Promise Technology Network Card M200f User Manual
VTRAK  
M-CLASS  
M500f, M500i, M500p, M300f, M300i, M300p,  
M200f, M200i, M200p  
PRODUCT MANUAL  
Version 1.5 / SR-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Architectural Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
M500f/i/p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
M300f/i/p, M200f/i/p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
FCC Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Chapter 2: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Unpack the VTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Mount VTrak M500f/i/p in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Mount VTrak M300f/i/p or M200f/i/p in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Install Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Drive Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Set Up Network Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Fibre Channel Storage Area Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Fibre Channel Direct Attached Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
iSCSI Storage Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
iSCSI Direct Attached Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
SCSI Direct Attached Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Set Up Serial Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Connect the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Chapter 3: Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
VTrak Setup with CLI or CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
CLI: Fibre Channel and SCSI Models (M500f/p, M300f/p, M200f/p)  
30  
CLI: iSCSI Models (M500i, M300i, M200i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
CLU: Fibre Channel and SCSI Models (M500f/p, M300f/p, M200f/p)  
32  
CLU: iSCSI Models (M500i, M300i, M200i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Install iSCSI Initiator on the Host PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Software-based iSCSI Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
VTrak Setup with WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Log-in to WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Language Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Create a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Additional Logical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Chapter 3: Setup, continued  
Log-out of WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Internet Connection using WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
VTrak Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Drive Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Audible Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Log-in/Log-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Log-in to WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Log-out of WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Graphic User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Management Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Event Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Administrative Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Fibre Channel Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
iSCSI Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
SCSI Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Storage Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Software Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Restore Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Clear Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Shutdown and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Identify Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
Physical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
Physical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PRO, continued  
Logical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141  
Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143  
Spare Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
Create Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
Delete Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152  
Spare Check – All Spare Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152  
Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153  
Logical Drive Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155  
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157  
VTrak Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157  
Drive Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159  
Audible Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160  
CLU Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
Telnet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
Exit the CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163  
CLU Function Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164  
Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173  
Subsystem Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173  
Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173  
Media Patrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173  
Lock Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173  
System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174  
Controller Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174  
Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174  
Enclosure Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176  
Enclosure Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176  
Enclosure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177  
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178  
Locate Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179  
Physical Drive Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179  
Global Physical Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179  
Individual Physical Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180  
Force Physical Drive Offline/Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181  
Locate Physical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181  
Disk Array Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182  
Create a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182  
Delete a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184  
Disk Array Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU, continued  
Disk Array Settings and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185  
Locate Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187  
Create a Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187  
Delete a Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188  
Logical Drive Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188  
Logical Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189  
Logical Drive Settings and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189  
Locate Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190  
Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191  
Management Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191  
iSCSI Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191  
Fibre Channel Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192  
Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192  
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192  
Fibre Channel Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194  
iSCSI Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195  
Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195  
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195  
Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196  
iSNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196  
SLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196  
CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
SCSI Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198  
Channel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198  
Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198  
Target Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199  
Background Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199  
Background Activity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200  
Background Activities List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200  
Event Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
Runtime Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
NVRAM Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
Additional Info and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
Spare Drive Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
LUN Mapping (Fibre Channel and iSCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203  
LUN Mapping (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204  
User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205  
Software Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207  
Flash through TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU, continued  
Clear Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212  
Restore Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212  
Shutdown and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213  
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214  
Chapter 6: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215  
Firmware Update – WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217  
Firmware Update – CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219  
Replace Power Supply – All Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220  
Replace Cooling Unit Fan – M500f/i/p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221  
Replace Cooling Unit Fan – M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p . . . . . . . . . .226  
Replace Cache Battery – M500f/i/p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230  
Replace Cache Battery – M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p . . . . . . . . . . . .233  
Replace SEP – M500f/i/p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235  
Replace SEP – M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236  
Replace RAID Controller – All Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237  
Chapter 7: Technology Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239  
Introduction to RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239  
Choosing a RAID Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247  
Stripe Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250  
Sector Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250  
Cache Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251  
Read Cache Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251  
Write Cache Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252  
Cache Line Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252  
Capacity Coercion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252  
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253  
Hot Spare Drive(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253  
Partition and Format the Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254  
RAID Level Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254  
Ranges of Disk Array Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256  
Media Patrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257  
Predictive Data Migration (PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257  
PDM Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257  
Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258  
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261  
VTrak is Beeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261  
LEDs Display Amber or Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262  
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262  
Drive Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264  
Back of Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265  
CLU Reports a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268  
WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269  
Event Notification Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271  
Critical & Offline Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286  
When a Disk Drive Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286  
With a Hot Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286  
Without a Hot Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287  
Rebuild Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287  
Enclosure Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289  
Connection Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292  
SCSI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292  
iSCSI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293  
Serial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293  
Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294  
Unsaved Data in the Controller Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295  
Chapter 9: Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297  
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297  
Contact Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299  
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302  
Returning Product For Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303  
Appendix A: Useful Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305  
Serial Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305  
SNMP MIB Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306  
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
•
•
•
•
About This Manual (below)  
Overview (page 2)  
Architectural Description (page 3)  
Specifications (page 6)  
Thank you for purchasing Promise Technology’s VTrak M-Class external disk  
array subsystem.  
About This Manual  
This Product Manual describes how to setup, use, and maintain the VTrak M-  
Class external disk array subsystem. It also describes how to use the built-in  
command-line interface (CLI), command-line utility (CLU), and embedded Web-  
based Promise Array Management—Professional (WebPAM PROe) software.  
This manual includes a full table of contents, index, chapter task lists, and  
numerous cross-references to help you find the specific information you are  
looking for.  
Also included are four levels of notices:  
Note  
A Note provides helpful information such as hints or alternative  
ways of doing a task.  
Important  
An Important calls attention to an essential step or point required  
to complete a task. Important items include things often missed.  
Caution  
A Caution informs you of possible equipment damage or loss of  
data and how to avoid them.  
Warning  
A Warning notifies you of probable equipment damage or loss of  
data, or the possibility of physical injury, and how to avoid them.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Overview  
VTrak provides data storage solutions for applications where high performance  
and data protection are required. The failure of any single drive will not affect data  
integrity or accessibility of the data in a RAID protected logical drive.  
Drive Carrier LEDs  
PROMISE  
VTrak M500  
Power and Status LEDs  
Drive Carriers  
Figure 1. VTrak M500f/i/p front view  
Drive Carrier LEDs  
Drive Carriers  
Power and Status LEDs  
Figure 2. VTrak M300f/i/p front view (M200f/i/p is similar)  
A defective drive may be replaced without interruption of data availability to the  
host computer. If so configured, a hot spare drive will automatically replace a  
failed drive, securing the fault-tolerant integrity of the logical drive. The self-  
contained hardware-based RAID logical drive provides maximum performance in  
a compact external chassis.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Storage Enclosure  
Processor (SEP)  
Fibre Channel  
RAID Controller  
Controller  
Mgmt  
FC  
1
FC  
2
IOIOI  
1
2
Power Supply  
Cooling Unit  
with Battery  
Cooling Unit Power Supply  
Figure 3. VTrak M500f Rear View (M500i/p have different controllers)  
Cooling Unit  
with Battery  
Controller  
iSCSI  
1
iSCSI  
2
Mgmt  
IOIOI  
Power Supply 1  
iSCSI  
RAID  
Controller  
Storage  
Enclosure  
Processor  
(SEP)  
Power Supply 2  
Figure 4. VTrak M300i/M200i Rear View (M300f/M200f and M300p/M200p  
have different controllers)  
Architectural Description  
The VTrak M-Class is a Direct Attached Storage (DAS) subsystem that can also  
function in a Storage Area Network (SAN). The subsystem supports 1.5 Gb/s and  
3.0 Gb/s SATA drives:  
•
•
•
VTrak M500f/i/p supports up to 15 disk drives in a 3U enclosure  
VTrak M300f/i/p supports up to 12 disk drives in a 2U enclosure  
VTrak M200f/i/p supports up to 8 disk drives in a 2U enclosure  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
All M-Class enclosures include a mid-plane, RAID controller, power and cooling  
units; and enclosure processor all in one cable-less chassis design. Multiple fans  
and power supplies provide redundancy to ensure continued usage during  
component failure. The RAID controller is hardware based and controls all logical  
drive functions transparently to the host system. VTrak appears to the computer’s  
operating system as a standard SCSI drive or drives.  
Features and Benefits  
Feature  
Benefit  
M500f/i/p: 3U 19-inch wide  
enclosure  
Installs easily in any standard rackmount.  
M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p: 2U 19-  
inch wide enclosure  
Installs easily in any standard rackmount.  
Supports RAID levels 0, 1, 1E, 5, Allows system to be tuned for maximum  
10, and 50  
performance.  
Supports online logical drive  
(array) expansion  
Lets you add disk drives to an existing  
logical drive without interrupting data  
accessibility  
Supports online RAID migration  
Allows you to convert a logical drive from  
one RAID level to another without  
interrupting data accessibility  
Supports Serial ATA drives  
Allows you to use existing SATA disk drives.  
Allow you to seamlessly move your existing  
Supports logical drive migration  
from other Promise RAID products logical drives to VTrak without recreating  
them.  
S.M.A.R.T. monitoring  
Warns of disk drive degradation and  
potential failure.  
Up to 25K IOPS (over two Fibre  
Channel or two iSCSI ports)  
High processing rate.  
1 Gb or 2 Gb sustained bandwidth High data thoughput.  
(Fibre Channel)  
Up to 1 Gb/sec sustained  
bandwidth (iSCSI)  
High data thoughput.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Feature  
Benefit  
Hardware-assisted XOR engine  
High-speed parity calculation for parity type  
logical drives.  
Supports out-of-band management Allows you to manage the RAID subsystem  
through RS232 and 10/100/1000 while maximizing bandwidth on the iSCSI  
BaseT Ethernet connections  
network.  
Supports SNMP (v2) CIM and  
WBEM standards  
API-ready for enterprise management  
integration.  
Tagged Command Queuing (TCQ) Maximum performance in Multi-Threaded  
up to 128 commands Operating Systems.  
Supports SATA II Native Command High performance and efficiency through  
Queuing efficient command re-ordering.  
Supports DDF compliant metadata Enabled disk array migration from one  
on disk controller to another.  
Hot-swap feature for drive carriers, Allows a defective component to be  
power supplies, fans, and battery replaced without interrupting data  
accessibility to the host system.  
Tool-less field-replaceable units  
(FRUs)  
All FRUs can be replaced without tools,  
saving time and effort for support personnel.  
Hot-spare drives  
Maintains full fault tolerant integrity by  
automatically rebuilding the data from a  
failed drive to an installed hot spare drive.  
Supports multiple, designated and global  
spares.  
Automatic background data  
reconstruction when a drive is  
replaced  
Logical drive is quickly back on-line with  
minimal user intervention.  
Redundant, hot-swappable cooling Load sharing and full operation even with  
units  
multiple failed fans.  
N+1 Redundant, hot-swappable  
power supplies  
Load sharing and full operation even with a  
failed power supply.  
Redundant Fibre Channel ports (f Load sharing and full operation even with a  
models)  
failed FC port.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Feature  
Benefit  
Redundant iSCSI ports (i models) Load sharing and full operation even with a  
failed iSCSI port.  
Redundant SCSI ports (p models) Load sharing and full operation even with a  
failed SCSI port.  
Cluster support  
Supports two- and four-node server clusters  
for performance and availability.  
Complete cable-less design  
All components easily plug directly into  
boards. No cables to complicate setup or  
maintenance.  
Cache battery backup  
Up to 72-hour backup for controller cache to  
retain data in case of power failure.  
Command-line and graphic-user  
interfaces  
Choice of control and monitoring methods  
for greater flexibility.  
Specifications  
M500f/i/p  
Drive Capacity: 15 SATA disk drives (3.5" x 1" form factor only).  
External I/O Ports (M500f): Dual 1-Gb/2-Gb Fibre Channel ports.  
External I/O Ports (M500i): Dual 1-Gb iSCSI ports  
External I/O Ports (M500p): Dual 320-MB SCSI ports  
Sustained Throughput (M500f): Up to 4 Gb/s (over two FC ports).  
Sustained Throughput (M500i): Up to 2 Gb/s (over two iSCSI ports)  
Sustained Throughput (M500p): Up to 640 MB/s (over two SCSI ports)  
Sustained I/Os: Up to 25,000 I/Os per second.  
Data Cache: 256MB predictive data cache with automatic write cache destaging  
and 72-hour battery backup protection.  
Supported RAID Levels:  
•
•
RAID 0  
RAID 5  
•
•
RAID 1  
•
•
RAID 1E  
RAID 50  
RAID 10  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Any combination of these RAID levels can exist at once on separate logical  
drives. See page 239 for more information on RAID.  
RAID Flexibility: Configurable RAID stripe size – 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 KB,  
and 1 MB sectors per disk.  
Rebuild priority tuning: Adjustment of minimum I/O reserved for server use during  
rebuild.  
Hot-spares: Multiple global and designated hot spares.  
Maximum LUNs: 32 per array in any combination of RAID levels and drive types.  
256 LUNs total.  
Supported Disk Interfaces: Serial ATA (SATA)  
Supported Operating Systems:  
•
•
•
•
Windows 2000  
•
•
•
SuSE Linux  
Novell Netware  
Sun Solaris  
Windows XP Professional  
Windows 2003  
RedHat Linux  
Current: 8 A @ 100 VAC; 4 A @ 200 VAC (max. rating with two power cords)  
Power Consumption: 440 watts  
Power Supply: Dual 500W, 100–240 VAC auto-ranging, 50–60 Hz, dual hot swap  
and redundant with PFC, N+1 design  
Thermal Output: 1590 BTU/hour (max current)  
Operating Temperature: 41° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)  
Non-operational Temperature: -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)  
Relative Humidity: Maximum 90%  
Vibration: Random, 0.21 grms, 5 to 500Hz, 30Mins, X, Y, Z axis  
Management Tools: WebPAM PROe, Command Line Utility, Command Line  
Interface  
Management Interfaces: Ethernet, RS232 (Serial)  
Management Protocols: SNMP, SSL, WBEM, Telnet  
Notification: Email, audible, and visible alarms  
Dimensions: Height, 5.12 in (13.00 cm); Width, 17.48 in (44.40 cm); Depth, 22.17  
in (56.30 cm)  
Weight: 68.34 lbs (31.00 Kg) without drives; 84.88 lbs (38.50 Kg) with 15 drives  
installed  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Safety Certifications: CE, FCC Class A, BSMI, VCCi, cUL, TUV, MIC  
Limited Warranty: 3 Years (See page 302 for details)  
M300f/i/p, M200f/i/p  
Drive Capacity (M300f/i/p): 12 SATA disk drives (3.5" x 1" form factor only).  
Drive Capacity (M200f/i/p): 8 SATA disk drives (3.5" x 1" form factor only).  
External I/O Ports (M300f/M200f): Dual 1-Gb/2-Gb Fibre Channel ports.  
External I/O Ports (M300i/M200i): Dual 1-Gb iSCSI ports  
External I/O Ports (M300p/M200p): Dual 320-MB SCSI ports  
Sustained Throughput (M300f/M200f): Up to 4 Gb/s (over two FC ports).  
Sustained Throughput (M300i/M200i): Up to 2 Gb/s (over two iSCSI ports)  
Sustained Throughput (M300p/M200p): Up to 640 MB/s (over two SCSI ports)  
Sustained I/Os: Up to 25,000 I/Os per second.  
Data Cache: 256MB predictive data cache with automatic write cache destaging  
and 72-hour battery backup protection.  
Supported RAID Levels:  
•
•
RAID 0  
RAID 5  
•
•
RAID 1  
•
•
RAID 1E  
RAID 50  
RAID 10  
Any combination of these RAID levels can exist at once on separate logical  
drives. See page 239 for more information on RAID.  
RAID Flexibility: Configurable RAID stripe size – 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 KB,  
and 1 MB sectors per disk.  
Rebuild priority tuning: Adjustment of minimum I/O reserved for server use during  
rebuild.  
Hot-spares: Multiple global and designated hot spares.  
Maximum LUNs: 32 in any combination of RAID levels and drive types.  
Supported Disk Interfaces: Serial ATA (SATA)  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Supported Operating Systems:  
•
•
•
•
Windows 2000  
•
•
•
SuSE Linux  
Windows XP Professional  
Windows 2003  
Novell Netware  
Sun Solaris  
RedHat Linux  
Current: 8 A @ 100 VAC; 4 A @ 200 VAC (max. rating with two power cords)  
Power Consumption: 340 watts  
Power Supply: Dual 400W, 100–240 VAC auto-ranging, 50–60 Hz, dual hot swap  
and redundant with PFC, N+1 design  
Thermal Output: 1160 BTU/hour (max current)  
Operating Temperature: 41° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)  
Non-operational Temperature: -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)  
Relative Humidity: Maximum 90%  
Vibration: Random, 0.21 grms, 5 to 500Hz, 30Mins, X, Y, Z axis  
Management Tools: WebPAM PROe, Command Line Utility, Command Line  
Interface  
Management Interfaces: Ethernet, RS232 (Serial)  
Management Protocols: SNMP, SSL, WBEM, Telnet  
Notification: Email, audible, and visible alarms  
Dimensions: Height, 3.50 in (8.90 cm); Width, 17.56 in (44.60 cm); Depth, 22.09  
in (56.10 cm)  
Weight: M300f/i/p, 55.12 lbs (25.00 Kg) without drives; 68.34 lbs (31.00 Kg) with  
12 drives installed  
Weight: M200f/i/p, 50.71 lbs (23.00 Kg) without drives; 59.52 lbs (27.00 Kg) with  
8 drives installed  
Safety Certifications: CE, FCC Class A, BSMI, VCCi, cUL, TUV, MIC  
Limited Warranty: 3 Years (See page 302 for details)  
FCC Statement  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2: Installation  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unpack the VTrak storage subsystem (below)  
Mount VTrak M500f/i/p in a Rack (page 12)  
Mount VTrak M300f/i/p or M200f/i/p in a Rack (page 14)  
Install Disk Drives (page 16)  
Set Up Network Cable Connections (page 20)  
Set Up Serial Cable Connections (page 25)  
Connect the Power (page 26)  
Unpack the VTrak  
The VTrak box contains the following items:  
•
•
•
•
•
VTrak Unit  
•
Screws for disk drives  
(36 for M200f/i/p; 52 for M300f/i/p;  
64 for M500f/i/p; including 4 spares)  
Quick Start Guide  
Null Modem Cable  
Left and right mounting rails  
•
•
1.5m (4.9 ft) Power cords (2)  
CD with SNMP files, Product  
Manual and Quick Start Guide  
1.0m External VHDCI SCSI  
cables (2 for M500p/M300p, 1  
for M200p)  
Warning  
The electronic components within the VTrak disk array are  
sensitive to damage from Electro-Static Discharge (ESD).  
Observe appropriate precautions at all times when handling the  
VTrak or its subassemblies.  
Important  
Use the following categories of network cables with VTrak:  
•
•
Cat 6, preferred  
Cat 5E, minimum  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Mount VTrak M500f/i/p in a Rack  
VTrak M500f/i/p  
Vertical Rack Post  
PROMISE  
VTrak M500f  
Mounting Rail  
(included)  
Direct attach to post  
Figure 1. Rackmounted VTrak M500f/i/p  
The VTrak M500f/i/p installs directly to the rack with or without using the supplied  
mounting rails.  
Rack front post  
VTrak subsystem  
Rack rear post  
VTrak attaching screw  
Rail adjustment screw  
Mounting  
Rail  
Back side  
of post  
Rail attaching screw  
(not included)  
Rail attaching screw  
(not included)  
Back side of post  
Figure 2. Mounting rail installation  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2: Installation  
If you plan to use the mounting rails, follow this procedure to install them:  
1. Attach one end of the rail to the back side of the rack’s front post.  
2. Reposition the adjusting screws as needed to fit the rail to the rack properly.  
3. Attach the other end of the rail to the back side of the rack’s rear post.  
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to attach the other rail.  
5. Square the rails in the rack and tighten the attaching screws.  
6. Set the VTrak onto the rails.  
7. Attach the VTrak to the rack’s front posts with the screws provided.  
Caution  
Do not pull or push the handles on the Power Supplies or the  
Controller units in order to move the VTrak. Hold the VTrak by the  
housing only.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Mount VTrak M300f/i/p or M200f/i/p in a Rack  
VTrak M300f/i/p  
Vertical Rack Post  
Handles mount  
outside the rack post  
Mounting rails (included)  
mount inside the rack post  
Figure 1. Rackmounted VTrak M300f/i/p (M200f/i/p is similar)  
The VTrak M300f/i/p or M200f/i/p installs to the rack using the supplied mounting  
rails. You can also use your existing rails.  
Rack front post  
Rack back post  
Rail adjustment screw  
Mounting Rail  
Sliding flange  
Rail attaching screw  
(not included)  
Rail attaching screw  
(not included)  
Inside of post  
Inside of post  
Figure 2. Mounting rail installation  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2: Installation  
Follow this procedure to install the rails:  
1. Check the fit of the rails in your rack system.  
2. Slide the plates out of the rails.  
3. Attach the rail plates to the VTrak housing.  
Line-up the rail plates using the studs. Install with six screws each side.  
4. Slide the rails over the plates.  
5. Attach the sliding flanges to the rails with the adjustment screws provided.  
6. Attach the four-hole flange to the inside of the rack’s front post.  
7. Attach the two-hole flange to the inside of the rack’s rear post.  
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to attach the other rail.  
9. Square the rails in the rack and tighten the attaching screws (not included).  
Cautions  
•
•
Do not lift or move the VTrak by the handles on the housing,  
power supplies or the controller units. Hold the VTrak by the  
housing only.  
Do not install the VTrak into a rack without rails to support it.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Install Disk Drives  
You can populate the VTrak with 1.5 GB and 3.0 GB SATA drives.  
•
•
•
VTrak M500f/i/p supports up to 15 disk drives  
VTrak M300f/i/p supports up to 12 disk drives  
VTrak M200f/i/p supports up to 8 disk drives  
All VTrak M-Class models provide the RAID configurations listed below. See  
Chapter 7, page 239 for a complete explanation of RAID on VTrak.  
Number of disk drives  
RAID Configuration  
Minimum  
Maximum  
RAID 0  
RAID 1  
RAID 1E  
RAID 5  
RAID 10  
RAID 50  
1
2
3
3
4
6
15  
2*  
15  
15  
14  
15  
* RAID 1 logical drives work in matched pairs. VTrak  
M500f/i/p supports up to seven (7) RAID 1 logical drives.  
M300f/i/p supports up to six (6) RAID 1 logical drives.  
M200f/i/p supports up to four (4) RAID 1 logical drives.  
If you use different size disk drives in the same logical drive, the total size of the  
logical drive will equal the size of the smallest disk drive times the number of  
drives.  
Caution  
Be sure to install the counter-sink screws supplied with the VTrak.  
Use of other types of screws can damage the adjacent drives.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2: Installation  
SATA Drive Mounting Holes  
SATA Drive Mounting Holes  
Figure 10.M500f/i/p drive carrier mounting holes  
SATA Drive Mounting Holes  
SATA Drive Mounting Holes  
Figure 11. M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p drive carrier mounting holes  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Serial ATA Disk Drive  
Figure 12.SATA Disk Drives mount at the front of the carrier  
1. Carefully lay the drive into the drive carrier at the front, so that the screw  
holes on the bottom line up.  
2. Insert the screws through the holes in the drive carrier and into the bottom of  
the disk drive (see Figure 4).  
•
•
•
Install only the screws supplied with the VTrak.  
Install four screws per drive.  
Snug each screw. Be careful not to over tighten.  
3. Reinstall the drive carrier into the VTrak chassis.  
4. Repeat these steps until all of your disk drives are installed.  
Cautions  
•
•
If you plan to operate your VTrak with fewer than a full load of  
disk drives, install all of the drive carriers into the enclosure, to  
ensure proper airflow for cooling.  
A VTrak M500f/i/p carrier is shown above. The VTrak  
M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p carrier is similar in appearance but  
the two carrier designs are NOT interchangeable.  
Important  
Be sure each drive is securely fastened to its carrier. Proper  
installation ensures adequate grounding and minimizes vibration.  
Do not install drives with fewer than four screws.  
Drive Numbering  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2: Installation  
Each disk drive in VTrak is identified by a number used for creating and  
managing logical drives. VTrak numbers disk drives from left to right. Numbers  
are stamped above each drive bay for easy indentification.  
Drive 1  
Drive 15  
VTrak disk drives are numbered left to right  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
Figure 7. VTrak M300f/i/p disk drives are numbered as shown. The  
M200f/i/p is similar, with 8 disk drives  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Set Up Network Cable Connections  
The VTrak M500f, M300f, and M200f share the same RAID controller design and  
use Fibre Channel (FC) connections for the data ports.  
The VTrak M500i, M300i, and M200i share the same RAID controller design and  
use iSCSI connections for the data ports.  
You can configure your VTrak data connections for a:  
•
•
Storage Area Network (SAN)  
Direct Attached Storage (DAS)  
The VTrak M500p, M300p, and M200p share the same RAID controller design  
and use SCSI connections for the data ports. SCSI is limited to a DAS solution.  
All VTrak models in this series have a single Ethernet (RJ-45) Management Port.  
connector that enables you to monitor the VTrak over your network using the  
WebPAM PROe Software. VTrak supports Ethernet and Telnet protocols.  
Fibre Channel Storage Area Network.  
Network Switch  
FC Switch  
Management  
Port  
Controller  
Mgmt  
FC  
1
FC  
2
IOIOI  
1
2
VTrak  
PC  
NIC  
FC HBA Card  
FC Port (1 of 2)  
Figure 8. VTrak M500f SAN connections (M300f and M200f are similar)  
This arrangement requires:  
•
•
A Fibre Channel switch  
A Fibre Channel HBA card in the Host PC  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2: Installation  
•
•
A network switch  
A network interface card (NIC) in the PC  
Connect the VTrak Fibre Channel data ports to your Fibre Channel switch to  
establish the data path.  
Connect the PC’s standard NIC and the VTrak Management Port to your network  
switch to establish the management path.  
Fibre Channel Direct Attached Storage  
Network Switch  
Management  
Port  
Controller  
Mgmt  
FC  
1
FC  
2
IOIOI  
1
2
VTrak  
FC Port (1 of 2)  
PC  
NIC  
FC HBA Card  
Figure 9. VTrak M500f DAS connections (M300f and M200f are similar)  
This arrangement requires:  
•
•
•
A Fibre Channel HBA card in the Host PC  
A network switch  
A network interface card (NIC) in the PC  
Connect the VTrak Fibre Channel data ports to your Fibre Channel HBA card in  
your PC to establish the data path.  
Connect the PC’s standard NIC and the VTrak Management Port to your network  
switch to establish the management path.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
iSCSI Storage Area Network  
Network Switch  
GbE Switch  
Management  
Port  
Controller  
iSCSI  
1
iSCSI  
2
Mgmt  
IOIOI  
VTrak  
PC  
NIC  
GbE NIC  
iSCSI Port (1 of 2)  
Figure 10. VTrak M300i and M200i SAN connections (M500i is similar)  
This arrangement requires:  
•
A Gigabit Ethernet network interface card (GbE NIC) with iSCSI support (in  
hardware or software)  
•
•
•
A GbE Switch with iSCSI support  
A network switch  
A network interface card (NIC) in the PC  
Connect the 1 GbE (iSCSI) NIC and VTrak Data Ports to your GbE switch to  
establish an isolated data path.  
Connect the PC’s standard network card and VTrak Management Port to your  
network switch to establish the management path.  
As an alternative, you can use the same GbE (iSCSI) NIC for your PC for  
management and data connections. However, combining management and data  
paths this way will reduce performance.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2: Installation  
iSCSI Direct Attached Storage  
Network Switch  
Management  
Port  
Controller  
iSCSI  
1
iSCSI  
2
Mgmt  
IOIOI  
VTrak  
PC  
NIC  
GbE NIC  
iSCSI Port (1 of 2)  
Figure 11. VTrak M300i and M200i DAS connections (M500i is similar)  
This arrangement requires:  
•
A Gigabit Ethernet network interface card (GbE NIC) with iSCSI support (in  
hardware or software)  
•
•
A network switch  
A network interface card (NIC) in the PC  
Connect the GbE (iSCSI) NIC in your PC to one of the VTrak Data Ports to  
establish an isolated data path.  
Connect the PC’s standard NIC and VTrak’s Management Port to your network  
switch to establish the management path.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
SCSI Direct Attached Storage  
Network Switch  
Management Port  
Controller  
IOIOI  
Mgmt  
In  
In  
Out  
Out  
1
2
VTrak  
NIC  
SCSI HBA  
Card  
In connector  
SCSI Channel  
(1 of 2)  
PC  
Figure 12. VTrak M300p and M200p DAS connections (M500p is similar)  
This arrangement requires:  
•
•
•
•
A network switch  
A network interface card (NIC) in the PC  
A SCSI HBA card in the PC  
A SCSI cable that fits your HBA card and has a VHDCI connector to fit the  
VTrak SCSI channel  
VTrak’s SCSI connectors are bi-directional. However, the internal termination  
feature works only on the “Out” connector. Internal termination is set to  
“Automatic” by default.  
Connect the PC’s standard NIC and VTrak’s Management Port to your network  
switch to establish the management path.  
Connect a SCSI cable to the PC’s SCSI HBA card and one of the VTrak’s SCSI  
channels. To use the internal termination feature, attach the SCSI cable to the  
“In” connector. An external terminator is not required for this arrangement.  
If you plan to connect multiple VTraks on a SCSI chain, connect the other side of  
the same SCSI channel on the first VTrak to a SCSI channel on the second  
VTrak.  
See “SCSI Channel Settings” on page 95 or “Channel Settings” on page 198 for  
more information about the internal termination feature.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2: Installation  
Set Up Serial Cable Connections  
The RS-232 Serial connection enables the Command Line Interface (CLI) and  
Command Line Utility (CLU) on your PC to monitor and control VTrak.  
DB-9Serial  
Connector  
DB-9Serial  
Connector  
Controller  
Controller  
iSCSI 1  
iSCSI 2  
Mgmt  
Mgmt  
FC 1  
FC 2  
IOIOI  
IOIOI  
1
2
Controller  
IOIOI  
Mgmt  
FC  
1
FC  
2
1
2
Controller  
iSCSI  
1
iSCSI  
2
Mgmt  
IOIOI  
Figure 13. Serial connectors for VTrak M500f (left) and M300i (right)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Connect the Power  
Plug in the power cords and switch on both power supplies. When the power is  
switched on, the LEDs on the front of the VTrak will light up.  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI-2  
Activity  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI-1  
Activity  
Logical Drive  
Status  
FRU  
Status  
Controller  
Heartbeat  
Power  
Figure 14.VTrak M500f/i/p front panel LED display  
Power  
FRU Status  
Logical Drive Status  
FC/iSCSI/SCSI-1 Activity  
FC/iSCSI/SCSI-2 Activity  
Controller Heartbeat  
Figure 15.VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p front panel LED display  
When boot-up is finished and the VTrak is functioning normally:  
•
Controller LED blinks green once per second for five seconds, goes dark for  
ten seconds, then blinks green once per second for five seconds again.  
•
•
Power, FRU and Logical Drive LEDs display green continuously.  
Fibre Channel/iSCSI/SCSI LEDs flash green if there is activity on that  
channel.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 2: Installation  
There are two LEDs on each Drive Carrier. They report the presence of power  
and a disk drive, and the current condition of the drive.  
Power/  
Disk Status  
Activity  
Figure 16.VTrak M500f/i/p drive carrier LEDs  
Disk Status  
Power/Activity  
Figure 17.VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p drive carrier LEDs  
After a few moments the Power/Activity should display Green.  
If there is no disk drive in the carrier, the Disk Status LED and the Power/Activity  
LED will remain dark.  
When you first power-up the VTrak, the audible alarm beeps twice to show  
normal operation.  
Go to “Chapter 3: Setup” on page 29.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3: Setup  
•
•
•
VTrak Setup with CLI or CLU (below)  
Install iSCSI Initiator on the Host PC (page 39)  
VTrak Setup with WebPAM PROe (page 41)  
VTrak Setup with CLI or CLU  
After installation, the next step is to configure VTrak.  
To set date, time, and IP addresses, you must use the Command Line Interface  
(CLI) or the Command Line Utility (CLU).  
For disk array creation, you can use the CLI, CLU or WebPAM PROe.  
This Chapter only deals with basic functions needed to setup a new VTrak. For a  
full discussion of VTrak functions, refer to WebPAM PROe on page 57 and the  
CLU on page 157.  
VTrak has a Command Line Interface (CLI) to manage all of its functions,  
including customization. A subset of the CLI is the Command Line Utility (CLU), a  
user-level interface that manages your VTrak via your PC’s terminal emulation  
program, such as Microsoft HyperTerminal.  
1. Change your terminal emulation program settings to match the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
Bits per second: 115200  
Data bits: 8  
Parity: None  
Stop bits: 1  
Flow control: none  
2. Start your PC’s terminal VT100 or ANSI emulation program.  
3. Press Enter once to launch the CLI.  
4. At the Login prompt, type administrator, and press Enter.  
5. At the Password prompt, type password, and press Enter.  
At this point, you are in the CLI. You can continue using the CLI to make  
network settings or you can switch to the CLU.  
•
CLI: Fibre Channel and SCSI Models (M500f/p, M300f/p, M200f/p)  
(page 30)  
•
•
CLI: iSCSI Models (M500i, M300i, M200i) (page 30)  
CLU: Fibre Channel and SCSI Models (M500f/p, M300f/p, M200f/p)  
(page 32)  
•
CLU: iSCSI Models (M500i, M300i, M200i) (page 34)  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
CLI: Fibre Channel and SCSI Models (M500f/p, M300f/p,  
M200f/p)  
1. Type the following string to set the Date and Time, then press Enter  
administrator@cli> date -a mod -d 2005/06/08 -t 16:45:00  
Type the date in yyyy/mm/dd format and the time in hh/mm/ss format with a  
24-hour clock. In the above example, the date was June 8, 2005. The time  
was 4:45 pm. Your values will be different.  
2. Type the following string to set the Management Port IP address and other  
settings, then press Enter.  
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -s "primaryip=192.168.10.87,  
primaryipmask=255.255.255.0, gateway=192.168.10.3"  
In the above example, the IP addresses and subnet mask are included as  
examples only. Your values will be different.  
If you prefer to let your DHCP server assign the IP address, type the  
following string, then press Enter.  
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -s "dhcp=enable"  
3. To verify the settings, type net, and press Enter.  
administrator@cli> net  
===========================================  
CId Port Type IP  
===========================================  
Mgmt 192.168.10.87 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.3 Up  
Mask  
Gateway  
Link  
1
1
This completes the Management port setup. Go to “VTrak Setup with WebPAM  
PROe” on page 41.  
To see the full set of CLI commands, at the admin@cli> prompt, type help, and  
press Enter.  
CLI: iSCSI Models (M500i, M300i, M200i)  
1. Type the following string to set the Date and Time, then press Enter  
administrator@cli> date -a mod -d 2005/06/08 -t 16:45:00  
Type the date in yyyy/mm/dd format and the time in hh/mm/ss format with a  
24-hour clock. In the above example, the date was June 8, 2005. The time  
was 4:45 pm. Your values will be different.  
2. Type the following string to set the Management Port IP address and other  
settings, then press Enter.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 3: Setup  
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -s "primaryip=192.168.10.87,  
primaryipmask=255.255.255.0, gateway=192.168.10.3"  
In the above example, the IP addresses and subnet mask are included as  
examples only. Your values will be different.  
If you prefer to let your DHCP server assign the IP address, type the  
following string, then press Enter.  
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -s "dhcp=enable"  
3. To verify the settings, type net, and press Enter.  
administrator@cli> net  
===========================================  
CId Port Type IP  
Mask  
Gateway  
Link  
===========================================  
1
1
1
1
1
2
Mgmt 192.168.10.87 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.3 Up  
iSCSI 0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Down  
iSCSI 0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Down  
4. Type the following string to set the iSCSI Port IP address and other settings,  
then press Enter.  
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t iSCSI -p 1 -s  
"primaryip=192.168.10.88, primaryipmask=255.255.255.0,  
gateway=192.168.10.3"  
If you prefer to let your DHCP server assign the IP address, type the  
following string, then press Enter.  
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t iSCSI -p 1 -s "dhcp=enable"  
5. To verify the settings, type net, and press Enter.  
administrator@cli> net  
===========================================  
CId Port Type IP  
Mask  
Gateway  
Link  
===========================================  
1
1
1
1
1
2
Mgmt 192.168.10.87 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.3 Up  
iSCSI 192.168.10.88 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.3 Up  
iSCSI 0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Down  
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set the other iSCSI port. Use -p 2 in place of -p 1.  
This completes the Management and iSCSI port setup. Go to “Install iSCSI  
Initiator on the Host PC” on page 39.  
To see the full set of CLI commands, at the admin@cli> prompt, type help, and  
press Enter.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
CLU: Fibre Channel and SCSI Models (M500f/p, M300f/p,  
M200f/p)  
1. At the admin@cli prompt, type menu and press Enter.  
The CLU main menu appears.  
2. With Quick Setup highlighted, press Enter.  
The first Quick Setup screen enables you to make Date and Time settings.  
System Date and Time  
1. Press the arrow keys to highlight System Date.  
2. Press the backspace key to erase the current date.  
3. Type the new date.  
4. Follow the same procedure to set the System Time.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3: Setup  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the Management Port  
configuration screen.  
Management Port  
By default, DHCP is enabled on VTrak (above). To set Management Port settings  
manually, or to view the current settings, you must disable DHCP.  
To view the current Management Port settings:  
1. Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP.  
2. Press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.  
The current Management Port IP are displayed (above).  
3. Record the information on this screen.  
4. Press the spacebar to toggle DHCP back to Enabled.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the RAID configuration  
screen.  
To make Management Port settings manually:  
1. Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP.  
2. Press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.  
3. Press the arrow keys to highlight IP Address.  
4. Press the backspace key to erase the current IP Address.  
5. Type the new IP Address.  
6. Follow the same procedure to specify the Subnet Mask, Gateway IP  
Address, and DNS Server IP Address.  
If you do not have a DNS server, skip the DNS Server IP address.  
7. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings.  
Exit the CLU  
1. Highlight Skip the Step and Finish and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Return to CLI and press Enter.  
This completes the Management port setup. Go to “VTrak Setup with WebPAM  
PROe” on page 41.  
CLU: iSCSI Models (M500i, M300i, M200i)  
1. At the admin@cli prompt, type menu, and press Enter.  
The CLU main menu appears.  
2. With Quick Setup highlighted, press Enter.  
The first Quick Setup screen enables you to make Date and Time settings.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3: Setup  
System Date and Time  
1. Press the arrow keys to highlight System Date.  
2. Press the backspace key to erase the current date.  
3. Type the new date.  
4. Follow the same procedure to set the System Time.  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the Management Port  
configuration screen.  
Management Port  
By default, DHCP is enabled on VTrak (above). To set Management Port settings  
manually, or to view the current settings, you must disable DHCP.  
To view the current Management Port settings:  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
1. Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP.  
2. Press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.  
The current Management Port settings are displayed (above).  
3. Record the information on this screen.  
4. Press the spacebar to toggle DHCP back to Enabled.  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the iSCSI Port 1 screen.  
To make Management Port settings manually:  
1. Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP.  
2. Press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.  
3. Press the arrow keys to highlight IP Address.  
4. Press the backspace key to erase the current IP Address.  
5. Type the new IP Address.  
6. Follow the same procedure to specify the Subnet Mask, Gateway IP  
Address, and DNS Server IP Address.  
If you do not have a DNS server, skip the DNS Server IP address.  
7. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the iSCSI Port 1 screen.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3: Setup  
iSCSI Ports  
By default, DHCP is enabled on VTrak (above). To set iSCSI Port settings  
manually, or to view the current settings, you must disable DHCP.  
To view the current iSCSI Port settings:  
1. Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP.  
2. Press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.  
3. Record the information on this screen.  
See the illustration on the next page.  
4. Press the spacebar to toggle DHCP back to Enabled.  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the iSCSI Port 2 screen.  
6. Follow the same procedure to view settings for iSCSI Port 2.  
7. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the RAID configuration  
screen.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The current iSCSI Port settings are displayed (above).  
To make iSCSI Port settings manually:  
1. Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP.  
2. Press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.  
3. Press the arrow keys to highlight IP Address.  
4. Press the backspace key to erase the current IP Address.  
5. Type the new IP Address.  
6. Repeat the previous steps to specify the Subnet Mask, Gateway IP Address,  
and DNS Server IP Address.  
If you do not have a DNS server, skip the DNS Server IP address.  
7. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the iSCSI Port 2 screen.  
8. Follow the same procedure to make settings for iSCSI Port 2.  
9. Press Ctrl-A to save these settings.  
Exit the CLU  
1. Highlight Skip the Step and Finish and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Return to CLI and press Enter.  
This completes the Management and iSCSI port setup. Go to “Install iSCSI  
Initiator on the Host PC” on page 39.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3: Setup  
Install iSCSI Initiator on the Host PC  
This step applies to the M500i, M300i, and M200i models only.  
To access the iSCSI data ports, you must have the iSCSI Initiator installed on  
your Host PC. You can use a Gigabit Ethernet network interface card (GbE NIC)  
with hardware-based iSCSI initiator from such vendors as:  
•
•
•
QLogic  
Intel  
Alacritech  
Contact the card manufacturer for the latest model information. Follow the  
installation and setup instructions that come with the card.  
Software-based iSCSI Initiator  
You can also use a software-based iSCSI initiator in combination with a GbE NIC.  
If you choose a Microsoft software iSCSI initiator, point your browser to  
www.microsoft.com, click on the Downloads link, and search for iSCSI  
Initiator. The instructions below apply to iSCSI Initiator version 2.0.  
Install the iSCSI initiator on your Host PC then proceed with the following steps.  
1. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, and double-click on iSCSI Initiator.  
Or double-click the iSCSI Initiator icon on the desktop.  
The iSCSI Initiator Properties dialog box displays.  
2. On the Discovery tab, click on Add button.  
3. In the Add Target Portal dialog box, type in the IP address of one of the  
VTrak’s iSCSI ports and click OK.  
4. Go to Targets tab. The iSCSI name should appear. It looks like:  
iqn.1994-12.com.promise.target.0.0.4.0.0.0.0.0.  
5. Highlight the ISCSI name and click the Logon button. Then click OK on the  
Log On to Target dialog box.  
To log off from VTrak, do the following:  
1. Launch the iSCSI Initiator as described above.  
2. Go to the Targets tab, highlight the VTrak iSCSI name, and click the Details  
button.  
3. Go to the Sessions tab of the Target Properties dialog box. The Identifier for  
the iSCSI name should appear. It looks like:  
ffffffff817b0494-4000013700000007  
4. Check the box to the left of the Identifier, click the Log off... button, then click  
the OK button.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
After the iSCSI Initiator is installed, follow the installation and setup instructions  
that come with your GbE NIC card.  
Note  
Setup of an actual iSCSI initiator takes place after the disk array  
and logical drive are configured on the VTrak. If you plan to use  
LUN Masking, enable this feature and specify your LUNs before  
setting up your iSCSI initiator.  
See “Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe” on page 57  
and “Chapter 5: Management with the CLU” on page 157 for more  
information.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3: Setup  
VTrak Setup with WebPAM PROe  
Notes  
•
•
You can also use the CLU to create disk arrays and logical  
drives. See “Chapter 5: Management with the CLU” on  
page 157 for more information.  
The WebPAM PROe software is embedded on the VTrak M-  
Class subsystem. No installation is required.  
Set up with WebPAM PROe consists of the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Log-in to WebPAM PROe (below)  
Language Selection (page 44)  
Create a Disk Array (page 45)  
Additional Logical Drives (page 54)  
Log-out of WebPAM PROe (page 54)  
Internet Connection using WebPAM PROe (page 55)  
Log-in to WebPAM PROe  
1. Launch your Browser.  
2. In the Browser address field, type in the IP address of the VTrak  
Management port.  
Use the IP address you obtained in Step 7. Note that the IP address shown  
below is only an example. The IP address you type into your browser will be  
different.  
Regular Connection  
•
•
WebPAM PROe uses an HTTP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..http://  
Enter the VTrak’s Management Port IP address . . . . 192.168.10.87  
Together, your entry looks like this:  
http://192.168.10.87  
Secure Connection  
•
•
WebPAM PROe uses a secure HTTP connection . . . . . . . . ..https://  
Enter the VTrak’s Management Port IP address . . . . 192.168.10.87  
Together, your entry looks like this:  
https://192.168.10.87  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Note  
Whether you select a regular or a secure connection, your login to  
WebPAM PROe and your user password are always secure.  
.
3. When the opening screen appears, type administrator in the User Name  
field, and type password in the Password field.  
The User Name and Password are case sensitive.  
4. Click the Login button.  
After sign-in, the WebPAM PROe opening screen appears (next page). If there  
are any unconfigured physical drives in the enclosure, the Array Configuration  
menu will also appear (see page 45).  
Important  
As soon as possible, assign the Administrator's password. Make  
the change under User Management. Each user you create will  
have his/her own login ID and password.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3: Setup  
Note  
Make a Bookmark (Netscape Navigator) or set a Favorite (Internet  
Explorer) of the Login Screen so you can access it easily next  
time.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The first time you log in to WebPAM PROe, there will be no Users except for  
“administrator”. Unless you created disk arrays or logical drives in the CLI or  
CLU, there will be no disk arrays or logical drives at this point.  
Logged-in User  
Subsystem (IP address)  
Administration Tools  
User Management  
Network Management  
FC / iSCSI / SCSI Management  
Storage Services  
Software Management  
Controller Group  
Enclosure Group  
Disk Array Group  
Spare Drive Group  
Logical Drive Summary  
Use the Tree to navigate to the various functions of WebPAM PROe. Click on an  
item in the Tree to display it in the window.  
Language Selection  
WebPAM PROe displays in English, German, French, Italian, Japanese, Chinese  
Traditional, Chinese Simple, and Korean. To set the display language:  
1. Click on Language in the WebPAM PROe Header.  
The language list appears in the Header.  
2. Click on the language you prefer.  
The WebPAM PROe user interface will display in the selected language.  
Note that online help is English only.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3: Setup  
Create a Disk Array  
Click on the Disk Arrays  
icon. The Array Configuration menu appears. Since  
this VTrak is newly activated, there are no disk arrays or logical drives yet.  
There are three options: Automatic, Express, and Advanced. Select one and click  
the Next button. Or select one from the dropdown menu on the Create tab.  
Automatic  
The Disk Array Automatic Creation option enables you to create a new disk array  
following a default set of parameters. One logical drive will be made automatically  
when you create the disk array.  
The number of unconfigured physical drives available will determine the RAID  
level of the disk array and whether a spare drive is created.  
When you choose the Automatic option, the following parameters display:  
•
Disk Arrays – The number of physical drives in the disk array, their ID  
numbers, configurable capacity, and the number of logical drives to be  
created  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
Logical Drives – The ID number of the logical drive(s), their RAID level,  
capacity, and stripe size  
Spare Drives – The physical drive ID number of the dedicated hot spare  
assigned to this disk array  
If you accept these parameters, click the Submit button. The new disk array  
appears in the Disk Array List on the Information tab.  
If you do NOT accept these parameters, use the Express (below) or Advanced  
(page 48) option to create your disk array.  
Express  
The Disk Array Express Creation option enables you to choose the parameters  
for a new disk array by specifying the characteristics you want. With this method,  
you can create multiple logical drives at the same time you create your disk array.  
However, all of the logical drives will be the same size and RAID level.  
If you prefer to specify the parameters directly, use the Advanced option to create  
your disk array.  
If you are uncertain about choosing parameters for your disk array, use the  
Automatic option.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3: Setup  
Follow these steps to create a new disk array.  
1. Check the boxes to select any one or a combination of:  
•
•
•
•
Redundancy – The array will remain available if a physical drive fails  
Capacity – The greatest possible amount of data capacity  
Performance – The highest possible read/write speed  
Spare Drive – A hot spare drive  
2. In the Number of Logical Drives field, enter the number of logical drives you  
want to make from this disk array.  
The maximum possible number of logical drives appears to the right of this  
field.  
3. From the Application Type menu, select an application that best describes  
your intended use for this disk array:  
•
•
•
File Server  
Video Stream  
Transaction Data  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
Transaction Log  
Other  
4. Click the Update button.  
Or check the Automatic Update box, and updates will occur automatically.  
The following parameters display:  
•
Disk Arrays – The number of physical drives in the disk array, their ID  
numbers, configurable capacity, and the number of logical drives to be  
created  
•
•
Logical Drives – The ID number of the logical drive(s), their RAID level,  
capacity, and stripe size  
Spare Drives – The physical drive ID number of the dedicated hot spare  
assigned to this disk array  
If you accept these parameters, proceed to the next step.  
If you do NOT accept these parameters, review and modify your selections  
in the previous steps.  
5. When you are done, click the Submit button.  
The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List on the Information tab.  
Advanced  
The Disk Array Advanced Creation option enables you to directly specify all  
parameters for a new disk array. If you select less than the total available  
capacity for the first logical drive, you can use the remaining space to create  
additional logical drives.  
For an explanation of the choices you will make while using the Advanced option  
to create your disk array, see “Chapter 7: Technology Background” on page 239.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3: Setup  
If you are uncertain about choosing parameters for your disk array, use the  
Express or Automatic option to create your disk array.  
To create a new disk array:  
1. Enter a name for the disk array in the field provided.  
2. Check the box to enable the following features.  
•
Media Patrol – A routine maintenance procedure that checks the  
magnetic media on each disk drive. Media Patrol is concerned with the  
condition of the media itself, not the data recorded on the media.  
•
PDM – Predictive Data Migration (PDM) scans the bad sector  
remapping table of the disk drives assigned to a logical drive. When the  
table fills to a specified percentage of its capacity, PDM triggers a  
migration of data from the suspect drive (the disk drive with the bad  
sectors) to a spare disk drive.  
3. Highlight physical drives you want in the disk array from the Available list and  
press the >> button to move them to the Selected list.  
You can also double-click them to move them.  
4. When you are done, click the Next button.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
On this screen you will specify your logical drives. Specify one logical drive at a  
time until the full capacity of the disk array is allocated.  
5. Enter an Alias (name) for the first logical drive.  
6. Choose a RAID level from the dropdown menu.  
The choice of RAID levels depends on the number of physical drives you  
selected.  
7. Specify a Capacity and the unit of measure (MB, GB, TB).  
This value will be the data capacity of the logical drive. If you specify less  
than disk array's maximum capacity, the remainder is available for additional  
logical drives.  
8. Specify a Stripe size from the dropdown menu.  
8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 KB, and 1 MB are available. 64 KB is the default.  
9. Specify a Sector size from the dropdown menu.  
512 Bytes, 1, 2, and 4 KB are available. 512 Bytes is the default.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3: Setup  
10. Choose a Read Cache policy:  
•
•
•
ReadCache  
ReadAhead  
No Cache  
11. Choose a Write Cache policy:  
•
•
WriteThru  
WriteBack  
12. Click the Update button.  
When you click the Update button, WebPAM PROe sets up one logical drive  
and adds it to the New Logical Drive lists at the bottom of the window.  
To create another logical drive, repeat steps 5 through 12, above.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
If you want to change a logical drive setting, click on the logical drive at the  
bottom of the window. The entry and the capacity usage are highlighted.  
Make your changes to the parameters and click the Update button.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3: Setup  
13. When you have finished specifying logical drives, click the Next button.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The proposed disk array appears with the logical drive(s) you specified.  
14. If you agree with the proposed disk array and logical drive(s), click the  
Submit button.  
If you disagree, click the Back button and make changes as needed.  
Additional Logical Drives  
If you want to create additional logical drives and there is unused space on the  
current disk array, click on the Disk Array  
icon and click on the Create LD tab.  
You will go to Disk Array Advanced Creation (see page 48).  
If the current disk array is fully allocated, use additional physical drives to create  
a new disk array. Click on the Disk Arrays  
icon, then select Automatic,  
Express or Advanced from the Create tab dropdown menu (see page 45).  
Log-out of WebPAM PROe  
There are two ways to log out of WebPAM PROe:  
•
•
Close your browser window  
Click Logout on the WebPAM PROe banner (below)  
Clicking Logout brings you back to the Login Screen. After logging out, you must  
enter your user name and password in order to log in again.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3: Setup  
Internet Connection using WebPAM PROe  
The above instructions cover connections between VTrak and your company  
network. It is also possible to connect to a VTrak from the Internet.  
Your MIS Administrator can tell you how to access your network from outside the  
firewall. Once you are logged onto the network, you can access the VTrak using  
its IP address.  
While only a Fibre Channel, iSCSI, or SCSI-capable PC can read and write data  
to the logical drives on the VTrak, other PCs can monitor the VTrak from virtually  
any location.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VTrak Status Indicators (below)  
Drive Status Indicators (page 59)  
Audible Alarm (page 60)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controllers (page 113)  
Enclosures (page 117)  
Physical Drives (page 122)  
Disk Arrays (page 128)  
Logical Drives (page 141)  
Spare Drives (page 150)  
Log-in/Log-out (page 61)  
Graphic User Interface (page 64)  
Subsystems (page 68)  
Administrative Tools (page 75)  
This chapter describes using embedded WebPAM PROe to monitor and manage  
your RAID system. This chapter is divided into sections for major WebPAM PROe  
components as shown above.  
VTrak Status Indicators  
Even though WebPAM PROe offers comprehensive monitoring of VTrak, the LED  
indicators on the VTrak unit provide important status information.  
When the power is switched on, the LEDs on the front of the VTrak will light up.  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI-2  
Activity  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI-1  
Activity  
Logical Drive  
Status  
FRU  
Status  
Controller  
Heartbeat  
Power  
Figure 1. VTrak M500f/i/p front panel LED display  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Power  
FRU Status  
Logical Drive Status  
FC/iSCSI/SCSI-1 Activity  
FC/iSCSI/SCSI-2 Activity  
Controller Heartbeat  
Figure 2. VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p front panel LED display  
When boot-up is finished and the VTrak is functioning normally:  
•
Controller LED blinks green once per second for five seconds, goes dark for  
ten seconds, then blinks green once per second for five seconds again.  
•
•
Power, FRU, and Logical Drive LEDs display green continuously.  
Fibre Channel/iSCSI/SCSI LEDs flash green if there is activity on that  
channel.  
See the table below.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
State  
LEDs  
Steady  
Green  
Flashing  
Green  
Dark  
Amber  
Red  
Power  
FRU*  
System Off  
Normal  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Fan or  
Battery  
Problem  
Fan or  
Battery  
Failed  
System Off  
Normal  
n/a  
n/a  
Logical  
Drive  
Logical  
Drive Critical DriveOffline  
Logical  
System Off  
No Activity  
Normal  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI 1 or 2  
n/a  
n/a  
Activity  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Controller System Off  
Normal**  
“n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
* Field Replacement Unit. “n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
** Blinks five times in five seconds, five seconds dark, blinks five times again.  
See page 215 for more information about field-replaceable components.  
See page 286 for a discussion of critical and offline logical drives.  
Drive Status Indicators  
There are two LEDs on each Drive Carrier. They report the presence of power  
and a disk drive, and the current condition of the drive.  
Power/  
Disk Status  
Activity  
Figure 3. VTrak M500f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Disk Status  
Power/Activity  
Figure 4. VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
The VTrak spins up the disk drives sequentially in order to equalize power draw  
during start-up. After a few moments the Power/Activity and Disk Status LEDs  
should display green.  
State  
LEDs  
Steady  
Green  
Flashing  
Green  
Dark  
Amber  
Red  
Power/  
Activity  
Drive  
Present  
No Drive  
Activity  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
No Power/  
No Drive  
Drive  
Rebuilding  
Drive  
Error  
Status  
Drive OK  
“n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
See “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 286 for a discussion of rebuilding and  
failed disk drives.  
Audible Alarm  
VTrak’s alarm has five different patterns, as shown below.  
1x  
1
2
3
4
5
.25s .25s .25s  
.25s  
.75s  
.25s  
.75s  
.25s  
2.5s  
.25s .5s .25s  
6s  
2x  
.25s .25s .25s .5s .25s  
.75s  
.25s  
1s  
.25s  
1.25s  
s
.25s  
3s  
When you first power-up the VTrak, it beeps twice to show normal operation.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
The audible alarm sounds at other times to inform you that the VTrak needs  
attention. But the alarm does not specify the condition. When the alarm sounds,  
do the following:  
•
Check the front and back of VTrak for red or amber LEDs, as described  
above.  
•
•
If email notification is enabled, check for new messages.  
Check for yellow !s red Xs  
in Tree View (see page 67).  
When a continuous tone sounds, there are multiple alarm patterns sounding at  
the same time.  
See “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on page 261 for diagnostic help.  
To make alarm settings, see “Buzzer” on page 121.  
Log-in/Log-out  
Log-in to WebPAM PROe  
1. Launch your Browser.  
2. In the Browser address field, type in the IP address of the VTrak  
Management port. See “Chapter 3: Setup” on page 29.  
Note that the IP address shown below is only an example. The IP address  
you type into your browser will be different.  
Regular Connection  
•
•
WebPAM PROe uses an HTTP connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .http://  
Enter the VTrak’s Management Port IP address . . . 192.168.10.148  
Together, your entry looks like this:  
http://192.168.10.148  
Secure Connection  
•
•
WebPAM PROe uses a secure HTTP connection. . . . . . . . . .https://  
Enter the VTrak’s Management Port IP address . . . 192.168.10.148  
Together, your entry looks like this:  
https://192.168.10.148  
Note  
Whether you select a regular or a secure connection, your login to  
WebPAM PROe and your user password are always secure.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
.
3. When the opening screen appears, type administrator in the User Name  
field and type password in the Password field.  
The User Name and Password are case sensitive.  
4. Click the Login button.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
After sign-in, the WebPAM PROe opening screen appears.  
Figure 5. WebPAM PROe Opening Screen  
The first time you log in to WebPAM PROe, there will be no Users except for  
“administrator”. There will be no disk arrays or logical drives.  
If you setup your VTrak using WebPAM PROe (see “Chapter 3: Setup” on  
page 29) you will have one User, “administrator” and one disk array and logical  
drive.  
Log-out of WebPAM PROe  
There are two ways to log out of WebPAM PROe:  
•
•
Close your browser window  
Click Logout on the WebPAM PROe banner (below)  
Clicking Logout brings you back to the Login Screen. After logging out, you must  
enter your user name and password in order to log in again.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Graphic User Interface  
•
•
Header (page 65)  
•
•
Management Window (page 68)  
Event Frame (page 68)  
Tree View (page 67)  
VTrak features a browser-based, graphic user interface. Your Internet browser is  
the basic component to access VTrak from your PC.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
There are four major parts to the graphic user interface:  
Item  
Header  
Function  
Enables you to make a language selection, show or hide  
the event frame, show or hide network storage  
subsystems, display contact information, log out, and  
display the Help directory.  
Tree View  
Navigates around all components of the Subsystem,  
including iSCSI management, network and service  
management, RAID controller, enclosure, physical drives,  
disk arrays, logical drives, and spare drives.  
Management Provides status and user selections, enables creation,  
Window  
maintenance, deletion, and monitoring of disk arrays and  
logical drives. Function Tabs control specific actions and  
processes.  
Event Frame Displays recent events. Click on View in the Header to hide  
or display this feature.  
Header  
Language Selection  
The VTrak graphic user interface displays in English, German, French, Italian,  
Japanese, Chinese Traditional, Chinese Simple, and Korean.  
To change languages:  
1. Click on Language in the Header.  
The list of available languages appears.  
2. Click on the language you prefer.  
The VTrak user interface will display in the selected language.  
View  
The VTrak graphic user interface can currently display in Event Frame along with  
the Tree View and Management View.  
The Event Frame displays the current Runtime Events for this subsystem. To  
view the Event Frame:  
1. Click on View in the Header.  
2. Click on the Show Event Frame popup option.  
The VTrak user interface will display the Event Frame below the  
Management Window.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
3. Click View again to hide the Event Frame.  
Storage Network  
The VTrak graphic user interface can currently display in Storage Network in the  
Tree View. The Storage Network consists of all the VTrak subsystem enclosures  
currently accessible on the network.  
When you log into a VTrak, that VTrak subsystem is the only one to display in the  
Subsystems list. To view the Storage Network:  
1. Click on Storage Network in the Header.  
2. Click on the Show Network Subsystems popup option.  
The VTrak user interface will display the Network Subsystems at the top of  
the Tree.  
3. Click Storage Network again to hide the Network Subsystems.  
Contact Us  
Click on Contact Us in the Header for a list of contact information for Promise  
Technology, including Technical Support.  
Contact information is also included in this manual. See “Contact Technical  
Support” on page 299.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Tree View  
Below are the components of Tree View.  
Logged-in User  
Subsystem (IP address)  
Administration Tools  
User Management  
Network Management  
FC / iSCSI / SCSI Management  
Storage Services  
Software Management  
Controllers  
Controller  
Enclosures  
Enclosure  
Physical Drives  
Physical Drives  
in this Enclosure  
Disk Arrays  
Disk Array  
Logical Drive  
Logical Drives  
in this Enclosure  
Spare Drives  
Spare Drives  
in this Enclosure  
Logical Drive Summary  
Logical Drives  
in this Enclosure  
The Administrative Tools section is different for the Super User than for other  
users. The remainder of the Tree is the same for all users.  
The Management Window displays information according to the item you select  
in Tree View.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Management Window  
The Management Window provides the actual user interface with the VTrak. This  
window changes depending on which item you select in Tree View and which tab  
you select in the Management Window itself.  
Event Frame  
To display the Event Frame, click on View in the Header, then click on Show  
Event Frame. Events are listed and sorted by:  
•
•
•
•
Number – A consecutive decimal number assigned to a specific event  
Device – Battery, controller, logical drive, physical drive, port, etc.  
Event ID – The hexadecimal number that identifies the specific type of event  
Severity – Information, Warning, Minor, Major, Critical, and Fatal. The  
severity level is user-specified. See “User Event Subscription” on page 77.  
•
•
Time – Time and date of the occurrence  
Description – A brief description of the event  
Click on the Subsystems  
icon and Events tab for event settings.  
Subsystems  
The Subsystems–Information tab lists all related subsystems. There are no user  
settings on this tab. To access the Subsystems–Information tab, click on the  
Subsystems  
icon in Tree View.  
Each individual subsystem is identified in the Tree by its Management Port IP  
address.  
To see all of the VTrak subsystems on your network:  
1. Move your cursor over Storage Network in the Header.  
A “Show Network Subsystems” message will appear.  
2. Click on the “Show Network Subsystems” message to display the  
subsystems.  
The list will show all subsystems on the network at the time the GUI was  
launched.  
3. To update the list, click the Discover button at the bottom of the list.  
To log into any of the displayed VTrak subsystems:  
1. In Tree View, click on the Subsystem icon of the subsystem you want to see.  
If your user name and password do not match the subsystem you are  
logging into, the log in screen will appear.  
2. Log in to the new subsystem, as needed.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Subsystem  
VTrak subsystems are identified in the Tree by their Management Port IP  
address. Click on the Subsystem icon in Tree View, then on the individual tabs  
in Management View to access the functions.  
Subsystem Information  
The Subsystem–Information tab provides information about a specific  
subsystem.  
To set an alias for this subsystem, click the Settings tab.  
To review the event log, click the Event tab.  
To review settings for Rebuild, Auto Rebuild, Synchronization, Initialization,  
Redundancy Check, Migration, PDM, Transition, and Media Patrol, click the  
Background Activities tab.  
To review the schedules for Media Patrol, Redundancy Check, Battery  
Recondition, and Spare Check, click the Scheduler tab.  
Subsystem Settings  
The Subsystem–Settings tab enables you to assign an alias (name) to a specific  
subsystem.  
To set an alias for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click on the Settings tab in Management View.  
3. Enter a name into the Alias field.  
Maximum of 48 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,  
and underscore. An alias is optional.  
4. Click the Submit button.  
To set a Date and Time for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. In Management View, click on the Settings tab dropdown menu and select  
Date and Time Settings.  
3. Under Subsystem Date, select the Month and Day from the dropdown  
menus.  
4. Type the current year into the Year field.  
5. Under Subsystem Time, select the Hour, Minutes and Seconds from the  
dropdown menus.  
6. Click the Submit button.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Subsystem Events  
The Subsystem–Event tab provides information from the event (log) file of a  
specific subsystem.  
Events are listed and sorted by:  
•
•
•
•
Number – A consecutive decimal number assigned to a specific event  
Device – Battery, controller, logical drive, physical drive, port, etc.  
Event ID – The hexadecimal number that identifies the specific type of event  
Severity – Information, Warning, Minor, Major, Critical, and Fatal. The  
severity level is user-specified. See “User Event Subscription” on page 77.  
•
•
Time – Time and date of the occurrence  
Description – A brief description of the event  
View Events  
To view the event log for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon Tree View.  
2. Click on the Event tab in Management View.  
3. From the Event tab dropdown menu, select Runtime Events or Subsystem  
Events in NVRAM.  
Runtime Events displays a list of and information about the 1023 most recent  
runtime events recorded since the system was started.  
Subsystem Events in NVRAM displays a list of and information about 63  
most recent important events. NVRAM events are stored in non-volatile  
memory.  
4. Click on the headings to sort the events.  
Clear Events  
To clear the event file for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon Tree View.  
2. Click on the Event tab in Management View.  
3. Click on the Clear Event Log button.  
4. In the Confirmation dialog box, type the word confirm then click the OK  
button.  
Save Events  
To save the event file for this subsystem in a tab-delineated text file:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click on the Event tab in Management View.  
3. Click on the Save Event Log button.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
4. In the File Download Security Warning box, click the Save button.  
5. In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the directory where you want to save  
the event file.  
6. Enter a name for the event file (“eventlog” is the default file name).  
7. Click the Save button.  
Background Activities  
The Subsystem–Background Activities tab provides information about functions  
that runs in the background on your subsystem:  
•
•
Disk Array Rebuilding. See “Disk Array Rebuild” on page 138  
Disk Array Synchronization. See “Logical Drive Synchronization” on  
page 146  
•
•
•
•
Logical Drive Initialization. See “Logical Drive Initialization” on page 145  
Disk Array Migration. See “Disk Array Migration” on page 137  
Disk Array Transition. See “Transition” on page 140  
Logical Drive Redundancy Check. See “Logical Drive Redundancy Check”  
on page 146  
•
•
Predictive Data Migration (PDM). See “Logical Drive PDM” on page 147  
Error and Reassigned Block Thresholds (to trigger PDM. See Block  
Threshold Definitions, below)  
•
Media Patrol. See “Physical Drive Media Patrol” on page 128  
Start Background Function  
To start a background function:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Background Activities tab in Management View.  
3. From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, choose the  
function you want to start.  
Change Background Settings  
To change the current settings:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Background Activities tab in Management View.  
3. From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, choose Settings.  
4. Click on the dropdown menu for the function you want to set and select a  
rate: Low, Medium or High.  
•
Low allocates fewer system resources to the function and more to data  
read/write operations.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
Medium allocates a balance of system resources to the function and  
data read/write operations.  
High allocates more system resources to the function and fewer to data  
read/write operations.  
5. Set the Reassigned Block threshold.  
When an error occurs in a physical drive, the directions to the block  
containing error are reassigned. When the number of reassigned blocks  
exceeds the threshold, PDM is triggered.  
6. Set the Error Block threshold.  
When an error occurs in the data or the physical media in a disk drive, the  
block is marked and added to the block error count. When the number of  
error blocks exceeds the threshold, PDM is triggered.  
7. Check the boxes to enable Media Patrol.  
For more information, see “Media Patrol” on page 257.  
8. Check the boxes to enable Auto Rebuild.  
Auto Rebuild enables rebuilding of a disk array when a suitable hot spare  
drive is available. For more information, see “Hot Spare Drive(s)” on  
page 253.  
9. When you are done, click the Submit button.  
Scheduler  
The Subsystem–Scheduler tab enables you to view and assign scheduled  
background activities on a specific subsystem.  
Scheduled activities include:  
•
•
•
•
Media Patrol. See “Physical Drive Media Patrol” on page 128  
Redundancy Check. See “Logical Drive Redundancy Check” on page 146  
Battery Reconditioning. See “Battery Recondition” on page 121  
Spare Drive Check. See “Spare Check – All Spare Drives” on page 152  
View Scheduled Activities  
To view scheduled activities for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon Tree View.  
2. Click on the Scheduler tab in Management View.  
Schedule an Activity  
To set a scheduled activity for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon Tree View.  
2. Click on the Scheduler tab in Management View.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
3. Click on the Scheduler tab dropdown menu and select an item (see the list  
above).  
4. In the Scheduler dialog box, check the Enable This Schedule box.  
5. Select a start time (24-hour clock).  
6. Select a Recurrence Pattern.  
•
•
Daily – Enter the number of days between events.  
Weekly – Enter the number of weeks between events and select which  
days of the week.  
•
Monthly – Select a calendar day of the month (1 – 31).  
If you select a higher number than there are days in the current month, the  
actual start date will occur at the beginning of the following month.  
Or, select a day of the week and select the first, second, third, fourth, or last  
occurrence of that day in the month.  
Then, select the months in which you want the activity to occur.  
7. Select a Range of Occurrence.  
•
•
Start-from date. The default is today's date.  
End-on date.  
Select No End Date (perpetual).  
Or, select a number of occurrences for this activity.  
Or, select a specific end date. The default is today's date.  
8. For Redundancy Check only, select either or both of the Auto Fix and Pause  
on Error options.  
9. For Redundant Logical Drives (all except RAID 0), check the boxes of the  
logical drives to which this activity will apply.  
Note  
You can schedule only ONE Redundancy Check for each logical  
drive.  
10. Click the Submit button.  
Delete an Activity  
To delete a scheduled activity for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon Tree View.  
2. Click on the Scheduler tab in Management View.  
3. Click on the Scheduler tab dropdown menu and select Delete Schedules.  
4. Check the box to the left of the schedule you want to delete.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
5. Click the Submit button.  
Lock  
The Subsystem–Lock tab displays lock status and enables you to lock or unlock  
a subsystem controller. The lock prevents other sessions (including by the same  
user) from making a configuration change to the controller until the lock expires  
or a forced unlock is done. When the user who locked the controller logs out, the  
lock is automatically released.  
You can set the lock to last from one minute to one day. You can also release the  
lock before the scheduled time.  
View Lock Status  
To view the lock status for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon Tree View.  
2. Click on the Lock tab in Management View.  
The following information is displayed:  
•
•
Lock Status – The User who set (owns) the current lock.  
Expiration Time – Amount of time left until the lock automatically  
releases.  
•
Expire At Time – The date and time when the lock will automatically  
release.  
Set Lock  
To set the lock for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon Tree View.  
2. Click on the Lock tab in Management View.  
3. Click on the Lock option.  
4. Enter a time interval between 1 and 1440 minutes (one day) that you want  
the lock to stay active.  
5. Click the Submit button.  
Renew Lock  
To renew an existing lock for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon Tree View.  
2. Click on the Lock tab in Management View.  
3. Click on the Renew option.  
4. Enter a time interval between 1 and 1440 minutes (one day) that you want  
the lock to stay active.  
The renew time replaces the previous Expiration Time.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
5. Click the Submit button.  
Release Lock  
To release the lock for this subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon Tree View.  
2. Click on the Lock tab in Management View.  
If you are the User who set the lock, click on the Unlock option.  
If another User set the lock and you are a Super User, click on the Unlock  
option and check the Force Unlock box.  
3. Click the Submit button.  
Administrative Tools  
The Administrative Tools screen is a set of links to individual functions. To  
access, click on the Subsystem  
Tree View.  
icon, then the Administrative Tools  
icon in  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
User Management. See page 75  
Network Management. See page 81  
Fibre Channel Management. See page 83  
iSCSI Management. See page 88  
SCSI Management. See page 95  
Storage Services. See page 97  
SNMP Management. See page 104  
Web Server Setting. See page 102  
Email Setting. See page 100  
Telnet Setting. See page 103  
CIM Setting. See page 106  
Netsend. See page 107  
Export File. See page 109  
Import File. See page 109  
Download Firmware/Software. See page 110  
Restore Factory Defaults. See page 110  
Clear Statistics. See page 111  
Shutdown. See page 111  
User Management  
User Management includes all functions dealing with user accounts.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
User Information  
The User Management–Information tab lists the user, his/her status, access  
privileges, display name, and email address. To access this tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
To add a user, log in as a Super User, then click the Create tab in Management  
View.  
To delete a user, log in as a Super User, then click the Delete tab in Management  
View.  
To access user settings, log in as a Super User, then click on a name link in the  
User list.  
Each user can access his/her own settings.  
User Settings – Administrator  
The Administrator or a Super User can view and change the settings of other  
users. To change settings of other users:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Information tab in Management View.  
5. In the list of users, click on the link of the user whose settings you want to  
change.  
The Settings screen for the selected user displays.  
6. Enter or change the settings for this user.  
•
•
•
•
Enable/disable this user  
Display name  
Email address  
Privilege. See “List of User Privileges” on page 80  
7. Click the Submit button.  
The Administrator or Super User can change another user’s password. See  
“User Password – Administrator” on page 79 for more information.  
User Settings – User  
The User Management–Settings tab enables a user to view and change his/her  
display name and email address. To change user settings:  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Settings tab in Management View.  
5. Enter or change the display name or mail address.  
6. Click the Submit button.  
User Event Subscription  
The User Management–Event Subscription tab enables a user to enable event  
notification, specify events of interest, and assign the levels of severity to be  
reported. To make these changes:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Event Subscription tab in Management View.  
5. Check the box to enable event notification.  
6. Under the subheadings, select the lowest level of Severity to be reported for  
each event. The selected level plus all higher levels of Severity will be  
reported.  
•
•
•
•
•
Information – Information only, no action is required  
Warning – User can decide whether or not action is required  
Minor – Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time  
Major – Action is needed now  
Critical – Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are  
serious  
•
•
Fatal – Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred  
None – Deactivates this event for notification purposes  
7. Click the Submit button.  
To change the email address for this user, click the Settings tab.  
To make email settings, click on the Administrative Tools icon, then click the  
Email Setting link in the Management Window.  
To send a test message to the email address in the listed under General Info,  
click the Test Email button.  
For VTrak’s Email settings, see “Email” on page 100.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
List of User Notification Events  
•
Shortcuts  
•
•
•
Enclosure – All items under Enclosure have the same Severity level  
RAID Core – All items under RAID Core have the same Severity level  
Host Interface – All items under Host Interface have the same Severity  
level  
•
Drive Interface – All items under Drive Interface have the same Severity  
level  
•
Enclosure  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Battery  
Battery Backup Unit (BBU)  
Blower (cooling unit fan)  
Cooling Unit  
Power Supply Unit (PSU)  
Storage Enclosure Processor (SEP)  
•
RAID Core  
Controller  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Disk Array  
Initialization  
Disk Data Format (DDF) Record of array information on the disk drives  
Media Patrol  
Online Capacity Expansion  
Physical Disk  
RAID Level Migration  
Rebuild  
Redundancy Check  
SMART  
Synchronization  
Subsystem  
Predictive Data Migration (PDM)  
Spare Check  
•
•
Host Interface  
•
Host Interface Controller  
Drive Interface  
•
Drive Interface Controller  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
User Password – Administrator  
The Administrator or a Super User can change another user’s password. To  
make these changes:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. In the list of users, click on the link of the user whose settings you want to  
change.  
The Settings screen for the selected user displays.  
5. Click on the Password tab in Management View.  
6. Enter the new password in the New Password field.  
7. Enter the new password in the Retype Password field.  
8. Click the Submit button.  
User Password – Users  
The User Management–Password tab enables a user to change his/her  
password or to add a password if none was previously assigned. To change your  
own password:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Password tab in Management View.  
5. Enter the current password in the Old Password field.  
If you do not have a password, leave this field blank.  
6. Enter the new password in the New Password field.  
7. Enter the new password in the Retype Password field.  
8. Click the Submit button.  
Create a User  
The User Management–Create tab enables a Super User to create other users.  
To create a user:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Create tab in Management View.  
5. Enter a user name in the User Name field.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
6. Enter a password for this user in the New Password and Retype Password  
fields.  
A password is optional. If you do not assign password, tell this user to leave  
the password field blank when he/she logs into to WebPAM PROe. The user  
can create his/her own password, see “User Password – Users” on page 79.  
7. Check the Enabled box to enable this user on this subsystem.  
8. Enter a display name in the Display Name field.  
A display name is optional but recommended.  
9. Enter the user's email address in the Email Address field.  
An email address is optional but recommended.  
10. Select a privilege level from the Privilege dropdown menu.  
For definitions of each privilege level, see the List of User Privileges below.  
11. Click the Submit button.  
List of User Privileges  
•
•
•
View – Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make any  
changes  
Maintenance – Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including  
Rebuilding, PDM, Media Patrol, and Redundancy Check  
Power – Allows the user to create (but not delete) disk arrays and logical  
drives, change RAID levels, change stripe size; change settings of  
components such as disk arrays, logical drives, physical drives, and the  
controller.  
•
Super – Allows the user full access to all functions including create and  
delete users and changing the settings of other users, and delete disk arrays  
and logical drives. The default “administrator” account is a Super User.  
Note  
Each user can select his/her password under the User  
Management–Password tab. The use of passwords for other  
users is optional  
Delete a User  
The User Management–Delete tab enables a Super User to delete other users.  
To delete a user:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
4. Click on the Delete tab in Management View.  
5. Check the box to the left of the user you want to delete.  
6. Click the Submit button.  
7. Click OK in the confirmation box.  
Note  
There will always be at least one Super User account.  
A Super User cannot delete his/her own account.  
User Sessions  
The User Management–Session tab enables you to see all of the current  
sessions on this subsystem, including Telnet sessions:  
•
•
•
•
•
User name  
Privilege level  
Application Interface (WWW, RS-232 or Telnet)  
Log-in date and time  
API Inactivity (time in seconds since the last activity)  
To view the current sessions:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Sessions tab in Management View.  
A Super User can logout other users:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the User Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Sessions tab in Management View.  
5. Check the box to the left of the user you want to log out.  
6. Click the Logout button.  
7. Click OK in the confirmation box.  
Network Management  
Network Management deals with network connections to the VTrak’s  
Management Port, and on iSCSI models, the network connections to the iSCSI  
Data Ports.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Management Port  
The Network Management–Ethernet tab enables you to see the current  
Management Port settings on the Controller, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controller ID  
Maximum number of ports supported  
Number of ports present  
Number of failed ports  
Port ID  
Port status (enabled or disabled)  
Link status (up or down)  
IP type  
DHCP status (enabled or disabled)  
Primary IP address  
Primary subnet mask  
Default gateway IP address  
Automatic Domain Name Service (DNS) through DHCP (yes or no)  
Primary DNS server IP address  
Primary MAC address  
Maximum speed supported by this connection  
To make changes to the Management Port settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools icon.  
3. Click on the Network Management  
icon.  
4. Click the Port 1 link in Management View.  
5. To enable DHCP, check the DHCP box.  
When DHCP is NOT enabled, enter the following:  
•
•
•
•
Primary IP address  
Primary subnet mask  
Default gateway IP address  
Enter a primary DNS server IP address.  
6. Click the Submit button.  
iSCSI Data Ports  
The Network Management–iSCSI tab enables you to see the current Data Port  
settings on the Controller, including:  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controller ID  
Maximum number of ports supported  
Number of ports present  
Number of failed ports  
Port ID  
Port status (enabled or disabled)  
Link status (up or down)  
IP type  
DHCP status (enabled or disabled)  
Primary IP address  
Primary subnet mask  
Default gateway IP address  
Primary MAC address  
Maximum speed supported by this connection  
TCP port number (3260 is the default)  
To make changes to the Data Port settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools icon.  
3. Click on the Network Management  
icon.  
4. Click the Port 1 or Port 2 link in Management View.  
5. To enable DHCP, check the DHCP box.  
When DHCP is NOT enabled, enter the following:  
•
•
•
•
Primary IP address  
Primary subnet mask  
Default gateway IP address  
Enter a TCP port number (3260 is the default).  
6. Click the Submit button.  
Fibre Channel Management  
This feature pertains the VTrak Fibre Channel models, M500f, M300f, and M200f.  
Fibre Channel Node  
The Fibre Channel Management–Node tab enables you to see the current Data  
Port settings on the Controller, including:  
•
Hardware Version  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
•
•
•
Firmware Version  
Number of failed nodes  
Supported Features  
Maximum Frame Size  
Supported Speeds  
To access this tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Fibre Channel Management  
4. Click the Node tab in Management View.  
icon.  
Fibre Channel Port  
The Fibre Channel Management–Port tab enables you to see the current Data  
Port settings on the Controller, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
State – Online, Offline, Unknown  
Port Identifier – A hexadecimal name for this port  
Topology Attached – Fabric Direct, Fabric Loop, Unknown  
WWNN – World Wide Node Name  
WWPN – World Wide Port Name  
Current Speed – 2 GB or 1 GB  
Link Type – Long-wave laser, short-wave laser or electrical  
Symbolic Name – A text name for this port  
Configured Link Speed  
Configured Topology  
Hard ALPA – Address can be 0 to 254. 255 means this feature is disabled  
To access this tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Fibre Channel Management  
4. Click the Port tab in Management View  
icon.  
Fibre Channel Port Settings  
The Fibre Channel Management–Port tab enables you to make Data Port  
settings on the Controller, including:  
•
Configured Link Speed – 2 GB, 1 GB or Auto (self-setting)  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
•
Configured Topology – N-Port (Point-to-Point), NL Port (Arbitrated Loop) or  
Auto (self-setting)  
Hard ALPA – Address can be 0 to 254. 255 means this feature is disabled.  
An ALPA identifies a port in an arbitrated loop.  
To access this tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Fibre Channel Management  
4. Click the Port tab in Management View  
icon.  
5. Click the Port1 or Port2 link in Management View.  
The table below shows the type of attached topology you will achieve based on  
your connection type and the configured topology you select:  
Fibre Channel Attached Topology  
Configured Topology  
Connection Type  
Switch  
N-Port  
NL-Port  
Fabric Direct  
Point to Point  
Public Loop  
Private Loop  
Direct  
Example 1: If you connect the VTrak to a Fibre Channel switch and select NL-  
Port topology, you will create a Public Loop attached topology.  
Example 2: If you have a Point to Point attached topology, you made a direct  
connection (no switch) and selected N-port topology.  
Note  
In some cases, HBA settings to N-Port only work if connected to  
the switch. Refer to your HBA manual for more information.  
Fibre Channel Statistics  
The Fibre Channel Management–Statistic tab enables you to view statistics of the  
Ports on the Controller, including:  
•
•
•
Time since last reset  
Number of frames sent  
Number of frames received  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Number of words sent  
Number of words received  
LIP Count – Loop initialization primitive count  
NOS Count – Not operational primitive sequence count  
Number of error frames  
Number of dumped frames  
Link Failure Count  
Loss Sync Count  
Loss Signal Count  
Primitive Sequence Error Count  
Invalid Word Sent Count  
Invalid CRC Count  
Initiator IO Count  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Fibre Channel Management  
4. Click the Statistic tab in Management View.  
icon.  
Fibre Channel SFP  
The Fibre Channel Management–SFP tab enables you to view information about  
the SFPs (small form-factor pluggable transceivers) on the Controller, including:  
•
•
•
Connector – Type of connector  
Transceiver – SFP  
Transceiver Code – Defines the method to interpret the transceiver type and  
compatibility options  
•
•
•
•
•
Serial Encoding – Serial encoding algorithm  
Bit Rate – In gigabits per second  
Link Length – The maximum link length depending on the type of fiber  
Vendor Name – Vendor name of the SFP transceiver  
Vendor OUI – Organizational Unique Identifier, SFP vendor’s IEEE company  
ID  
•
•
•
•
Vendor Part Number  
Vendor Revision  
Vendor Serial Number  
Manufacturing Date – Code with 2 digits each for year, month, day, and  
optional vendor-specific lot number  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
To access this tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
icon.  
3. Click on the Fibre Channel Management  
4. Click the SFP tab in Management View  
icon.  
Fibre Channel Logged-in Devices  
The Fibre Channel Management–Logged In Device tab enables you to view  
information about the logged-in devices on the two Fibre Channel ports,  
including:  
•
•
•
•
# – Device number  
WWPN – World Wide Port Name  
Port ID – ID of the device, not the Fibre Channel port  
Symbolic Name – If used  
One of the devices in the list for each port will be the port itself. If there is no other  
device, this notification will appear: There is no logged in device. If a Fibre  
Channel switch is attached, it will also appear in this list.  
To access this tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Fibre Channel Management  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the Logged In Device tab in Management View  
Fibre Channel Initiators  
The Fibre Channel Management–Initiator tab enables you to view information  
about the initiators on the two Fibre Channel ports, including:  
•
•
•
•
# – Device number  
WWPN – World Wide Port Name  
Port ID – ID of the initiator, not the Fibre Channel port  
Symbolic Name – If used  
A Fibre Channel switch will also display as an initiator in the list. If your Host PC's  
Fibre Channel HBA is connected to the VTrak directly (not though a Fibre  
Channel switch), the initiator will NOT display in the initiator list.  
To access this tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
icon.  
3. Click on the Fibre Channel Management  
4. Click the Initiator tab in Management View.  
icon.  
To add or delete an initiator, see “Storage Services” on page 97.  
iSCSI Management  
This feature pertains the VTrak iSCSI models, M500i, M300i, and M200i.  
A detailed explanation of these iSCSI functions, how and when they are used,  
and their relationship to one another is beyond the scope of this document. For  
more information, contact the Internet Engineering Task Force at http://  
www.ietf.org/.  
iSCSI Node  
The iSCSI Management–iSCSI Node tab enables you to see the current Data  
Port settings on the Controller, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maximum number of nodes supported  
Number of nodes present  
Number of failed nodes  
Node ID  
Node Name – An iSCSI node is identified by its name.  
Node Alias – Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space  
between words, and underscore. An alias is optional.  
•
•
•
•
•
Max outstanding R2T – Sets the maximum number of outstanding ready to  
transfer PDUs (a number).  
Maximum burst length – Maximum length of a solicited data sequence (512  
b to 16 Mb).  
Maximum number of connections – Maximum number of connections  
supported.  
Default time to wait – After a dropped connection, the number of seconds to  
wait before attempting to reconnect.  
Default time to retain – Number of seconds after time to wait (above) before  
reassigning outstanding commands.  
•
•
Error recovery level – Error recovery level supported.  
Initial R2T – Allows initiator to begin sending data to a target without  
receiving a ready to transfer command.  
•
•
•
Header Digest – Enables the use of Header Digest (CRC). See note below.  
Data Digest – Enables the use of a Data Digest (CRC). See note below.  
Data PDU in order – Enables placement of data in PDU order.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
•
Data sequence in order – Enables placement of data in sequence order.  
Uni-directional CHAP Authentication – Enables Challenge Handshake  
Authentication Protocol.  
•
Bi-directional CHAP Authentication – Enables bi-directional and uni-  
directional CHAP authentication.  
To make changes to the Data Port settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the iSCSI Node 1 link in Management View.  
5. Type an alias in the Alias field.  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,  
and underscore. An alias is optional.  
6. Enter the values in the fields as required  
7. Check the boxes to enable features as required.  
8. Click the Submit button.  
Notes  
Header Digest and Data Digest work best with initiators equipped  
with a TCP Offload Engine (TOE). Refer to your iSCSI HBA user  
manual for more information.  
For iSCSI network settings on the Data Ports, click on the Network  
Management icon, then click on the iSCSI Network tab  
iSCSI Ports  
The iSCSI Management–Portal tab enables you to see the current Data Port  
settings. To access to the iSCSI Management–Portal tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the Portal tab in Management View.  
Information (in GUI order):  
•
•
•
•
Controller ID – (1).  
Port ID – (1 or 2).  
Max Receive Data Segment Length – (512 KB is the default).  
Number of Active Sessions – (Number of sessions logged into this port).  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
•
Primary Header Digest Method – (None).  
Primary Data Digest Method – (None).  
iSCSI Receive Marker – (None).  
iSCSI Port Statistics  
The iSCSI Management–Portal tab, Port Statistics dropdown menu enables you  
to see the current Data Port statistics.To access to the iSCSI Management–Ports  
tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the Portal tab dropdown menu in Management View and select Port  
Statistics.  
Statistics (in GUI order):  
•
•
•
Controller ID – VTrak Controller ID.  
Port ID – VTrak Controller Port ID.  
MAC Counts  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transmitted Frames  
Transmitted Bytes  
Received Frames  
Received Bytes  
CRC Errors  
Encoding Errors  
•
IP Counts  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transmitted Packets  
Transmitted Bytes  
Transmitted Fragments  
Received Packets  
Received Bytes  
Received Fragments  
Received Datagram Reassemblies  
Received Packet Errors  
Datagram Reassembly Time-outs  
Fragments received out-of-order  
Fragments received overlapped  
•
TCP Counts  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transmitted Segments  
Transmitted Bytes  
Received Segments  
Received Bytes  
Retransmit Timer Expire  
Persist Timer Expired  
Received Pure ACKs  
Received Duplicate ACKs  
Transmitted Pure ACKs  
Transmitted Duplicate ACKs  
Received Segments out-of-order  
Received Segment Errors  
Received Window Updates  
Received Window Probes  
•
iSCSI Counts  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transmitted PDUs  
Transmitted Data Bytes  
Received PDUs  
Received Data Bytes  
I/O Comp Bytes  
Unexpected I/O received  
Format Errors  
Header Digest Errors  
Data Digest Errors  
Sequence Errors  
iSCSI Sessions  
The iSCSI Management–Sessions tab lists the current iSCSI sessions on the  
Data Ports. The window displays session information. Click the Statistics link to  
see session statistics. To access to the iSCSI Management–Sessions tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the Sessions tab in Management View.  
The window displays session information.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
iSCSI iSNS  
The iSCSI Management–iSNS tab enables you to view and change the current  
iSNS settings on the Controller data ports. Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS)  
is a protocol used to facilitate the automated discovery, management, and  
configuration of iSCSI and Fibre Channel devices on a TCP/IP network.  
•
•
•
•
•
iSNS port ID number (1 or 2)  
iSNS status. Enabled or disabled  
ESI status. Enabled or disabled  
Get iSNS IP through DHCP. Yes or No  
iSNS Server IP address  
•
iSNS Server Port number (3205 for most applications)  
Note  
Edge Side Includes (ESI) is a markup language that enables  
dynamic assembly of web page elements in servers across a  
network. This feature enables automatically if iSNS is enabled and  
an iSNS server is present.  
To make changes to the iSNS settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the iSNS tab in Management View.  
5. Click the iSNS Port 1 or iSNS Port 2 link.  
6. Check the box to enable iSNS.  
7. Enter the iSNS server IP address.  
8. Enter a new iSNS Port number if required.  
9. Click the Submit button.  
Notes  
To see the current iSNS initiator nodes, click on the iSNS tab  
dropdown menu, and select Get Initiators. You might have to wait  
until the iSNS server updates the initiator list.  
To see the current iSNS target nodes, click on the iSNS tab  
dropdown menu and select Get Targets. You might have to wait  
until the iSNS server updates the target list.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
iSCSI SLP  
The iSCSI Management–SLP tab enables you to view and change the current  
settings on the Controller data ports. Service Location Protocol (SLP) is a  
standard used to discover services over the Internet. It includes Service Agents  
(SA) that advertise services, and a Directory Agent (DA) that gathers and  
organizes the data for queries.  
•
•
•
Port ID – (1 or 2)  
SLP status – Enabled or Disabled  
Use Directory Agent – Yes or No  
To make changes to the SLP settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the SLP tab in Management View.  
5. Click the SLP Port 1 or SLP Port 2 link.  
6. Check the box to enable SLP.  
7. Check the box to enable Use Directory Agent.  
8. Choose one of the following:  
•
Check the box to enable Get Directory Agent IP Through DHCP.  
The Use Directory Agent box must be checked.  
•
Or enter a DA IP address in the field provided.  
The Use Directory Agent box must be checked.  
The Get Directory Agent IP Through DHCP box must be UNchecked.  
9. Click the Submit button.  
iSCSI CHAP  
The iSCSI Management–CHAP tab displays the current CHAP settings.  
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is an authentication agent  
(typically a network server) sends the client program a random value and an ID  
value. Both the sender and peer share a predefined secret. The peer  
concatenates the random value, the ID, and the secret and calculates a one-way  
hash value. The hash value is sent to the authenticator, which in turn builds that  
same string on its side, calculates the sum, and compares the result with the  
value received from the peer. If the values match, the peer is authenticated.  
View CHAPs  
To view the current CHAPs:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the CHAP tab in Management View.  
Add a CHAP  
To add a new CHAP:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the CHAP tab in Management View.  
5. Click on the CHAP tab dropdown menu and select Add CHAP.  
6. Enter a name in the Name field.  
7. Enter a secret of 16 or more characters in the Secret field.  
8. Enter the secret again in the Retype Secret field.  
9. Select the CHAP type.  
Peer to peer is one-way authentication. Local is bi-directional authentication.  
10. Click the Submit button.  
Edit a CHAP  
To edit a CHAP:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the CHAP tab in Management View.  
5. Click on the CHAP name link.  
6. Enter a name in the Name field.  
7. Enter a secret of 16 or more characters in the Secret field.  
8. Enter the secret again in the Retype Secret field.  
9. Select the CHAP type.  
Peer to peer is one-way authentication. Local is bi-directional authentication.  
10. Click the Submit button.  
Delete a CHAP  
To delete a CHAP:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
icon.  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
4. Click on the CHAP tab in Management View.  
5. Click on the CHAP tab dropdown menu and select Delete CHAP.  
6. Check the box to the left of the CHAP you want to delete.  
7. Click the Submit button.  
iSCSI Ping  
The iSCSI Management–Ping tab enables you to verify a network connection  
through VTrak’s iSCSI data ports.  
To send a ping:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the iSCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Ping tab in Management View.  
5. Enter the IP address you want to ping in the IP Address field.  
6. Select the data port (1 or 2) from the Ping Through Port dropdown menu.  
7. Click the Submit button.  
After a few moments, the result displays in the iSCSI Ping Operation header.  
SCSI Management  
SCSI Channel Information  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the SCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
The Channel tab displays SCSI Channel Information:  
•
•
•
Maximum Data Transfer Rate  
Termination Status  
List of currently enabled targets  
To see Target information, click the Target tab.  
SCSI Channel Settings  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the SCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
The Channel tab displays SCSI Channel Information:  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
4. Click on the Channel 1 or the Channel 2 link.  
The settings screen displays a list of the 16 Targets and Termination for the  
selected SCSI channel.  
To enable a SCSI target:  
1. Check (click on) the TID box beside the target you want to enable.  
Checked means enabled, unchecked means disabled.  
2. Click the Submit button.  
Note  
You must restart the VTrak for new settings to become effective.  
See “Shutdown and Restart” on page 111.  
To set Termination for the VTrak SCSI controller “Out” connectors:  
1. From the Termination dropdown menu, select Automatic, ON or OFF.  
Automatic means the termination function will set itself automatically.  
2. Click the Submit button.  
Cautions  
•
•
Turn off termination only when the VTrak is NOT the last  
device in the SCSI chain.  
Internal termination only works on the “Out” SCSI connectors.  
SCSI Target Information  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the SCSI Management  
icon.  
icon.  
The Channel tab displays SCSI Channel Information:  
4. Click on the Target tab.  
The Target tab displays information about the 16 SCSI targets on each of the  
two SCSI channels:  
•
•
•
Status – Enabled or Disabled  
Negotiated Transfer Rate – Data Transfer Rate in MB/s  
Bus Width – Narrow or Wide  
A value of N/A under Transfer Rate or Bus Width appears when the Target is  
disabled. To enable a SCSI Target, see “SCSI Channel Settings” on  
page 95.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Storage Services  
Storage Services include managing Initiator and LUN mapping. These functions  
are similar for Fibre Channel and iSCSI VTrak models, with a few minor  
differences in Initiator naming conventions, as noted below. Initiators do not apply  
to SCSI models. LUN Mapping is different for SCSI models.  
Initiators  
The Storage Services–Initiators tab enables you to add and delete initiators. This  
function applies to Fibre Channel and iSCSI VTrak models.  
Add an Initiator  
To add an initiator:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Storage Services  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the Initiators tab in Management View.  
5. From the Initiators tab dropdown menu, select Add Initiator.  
6. Enter the initiator’s initiator's name in the Initiator Name field.  
A Fibre Channel initiator name is the World Wide Port Name of the device  
and is composed of a series of eight, two-digit hexadecimal numbers.  
An iSCSI initiator name is the iSCSI name of the initiator device and is  
composed of a single text string. iSCSI WWNs are somewhat different from  
regular WWNs.  
Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host system.  
Note that the initiator name you input must match exactly in order for the  
connection to work.  
7. Click the Submit button.  
Delete an Initiator  
To delete an initiator:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Storage Services  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the Initiators tab in Management View.  
5. From the Initiators tab dropdown menu, select Delete Initiators.  
6. Check the box to the left of the initiator you want to delete.  
7. Click the Submit button.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
LUN Map – Fibre Channel and iSCSI  
The Storage Services–LUN Map tab displays a list of initiators recognized by the  
VTrak controller and their corresponding LUN mapping.  
View LUN Map  
To view the current LUN Map:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Storage Services  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.  
LUN Masking is the process of applying a LUN Map so that each initiator can  
only access the LUNs specified for it.  
Enable LUN Masking  
To enable the LUN Masking:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Storage Services  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.  
5. Click the LUN Masking Enabled box.  
6. Click the Submit button.  
Edit a LUN Map  
To edit the LUN Map:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Storage Services  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.  
5. From the LUN Map tab dropdown menu, select Edit LUN Map.  
6. Select an initiator from the Initiator dropdown menu.  
Or enter the initiator's WWN in the Initiator Name field.  
Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host system.  
Note that the initiator name you input must match exactly in order for the  
connection to work.  
7. Click the Submit button.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
LUN Mapping Parameters  
•
Initiator – The Fibre Channel or iSCSI card in the Host system that initiates  
commands to the target (VTrak).  
•
•
•
•
•
Logical Drive ID – This is actually the disk array ID number.  
RAID Level – RAID Level of the logical drive.  
Capacity – Capacity of the logical drive.  
Serial Number – Serial number of the logical drive.  
WWN – World Wide Name, used for the Initiator name.  
A Fibre Channel initiator name is the World Wide Port Name of the device  
and is composed of a series of eight, two-digit hexadecimal numbers.  
An iSCSI initiator name is the iSCSI name of the initiator device and is  
composed of a single text string. iSCSI WWNs are somewhat different from  
regular WWNs.  
•
LUN – Logical Unit Number on this logical drive for the selected initiator.  
You must enter different LUN numbers for each logical drive.  
LUN Map – SCSI  
The Storage Services–LUN Map tab displays the Target IDs and LUNs assigned  
to each logical drive.  
For SCSI, LUN Mapping is the process of applying a LUN Map so that each  
channel can access the logical drive (target).  
View LUN Map  
To view the current LUN Map:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Storage Services  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.  
Edit a LUN Map  
Important  
You must enable a Target before you assign a LUN to it. See  
“SCSI Channel Settings” on page 95.  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Storage Services  
icon in Tree view.  
icon.  
icon.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
4. Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.  
5. From the LUN Map tab dropdown menu, select Edit LUN Map.  
6. Select Port 1 or Port 2 from the Port ID dropdown menu.  
7. In the LUN Mapping and Masking table, select a Logical Drive ID with empty  
Target ID and LUN fields.  
8. Type a Target ID into the Target ID field.  
Target IDs range from 0 to 15.  
9. Type a LUN into the LUN field.  
LUNs range from 0 to 63. The number of available LUNs may be less,  
depending on the capability of your SCSI HBA card.  
10. Click the Submit button.  
LUN Mapping Parameters  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Logical Drive ID – The disk array ID number.  
RAID Level – RAID Level of the logical drive.  
Capacity – Capacity of the logical drive.  
WWN – World Wide Number of the logical drive.  
Target ID – Active Target ID on this logical drive for the selected port.  
LUN – Logical Unit Number on this logical drive for the selected port.  
You must enter different LUN numbers for each logical drive.  
Software Management  
Email  
VTrak's Email service sends notifications to the specified Users according to  
settings under their Event Subscription. See “User Event Subscription” on  
page 77.  
To change the Email settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
icon.  
3. Click on the Email Setting link.  
4. Enter the IP address for your SMTP server.  
5. Enter server port number for your SMTP server.  
25 is the default.  
6. Select Yes to enable SMTP authentication or No to disable.  
7. If you selected Yes for SMTP authentication, enter a Username and  
Password in the fields provided.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
8. Enter an Email sender address (example: [email protected]).  
9. Enter an Email subject (example: VTrak Status).  
10. When you are done, click on the Submit button.  
Send a Test Message  
To send one test message to the User currently logged into the VTrak GUI:  
1. Make the Email settings as described above.  
2. Under Test Email, check the “Send A Test Email” box.  
3. Click on the Submit button.  
Change Email Setting  
To change the Email Automatic/Manual start setting:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Email Setting link.  
4. Under Startup Type:  
icon.  
•
Click on the Automatic option to start the service automatically during  
system startup.  
•
Click on the Manual option to start the service manually (the service  
does not start during system startup).  
5. Click on the Submit button.  
Manual Start, Restart, Stop  
To manually start, restart or stop the Email service:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Email Setting link.  
4. Under Running Status:  
icon.  
•
•
If the service is stopped, click the Start button to start the service.  
If the service is started, click the Stop button to stop the service.  
Or click on the Restart button to restart the service.  
SLP  
VTrak’s SLP service discovers services available over the Internet.  
To change the SLP startup settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
3. Click on the SLP Setting link.  
4. Under Startup Type:  
•
Click on the Automatic option to start the service automatically during  
system startup.  
•
Click on the Manual option to start the service manually (the service  
does not start during system startup).  
5. Click on the Submit button.  
Manual Start, Restart, Stop  
To manually start, restart or stop the SLP service:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the SLP Setting link.  
4. Under Running Status:  
•
•
If the service is stopped, click the Start button to start the service.  
If the service is started, click the Stop button to stop the service.  
Or click on the Restart button to restart the service.  
Web Server  
VTrak’s Web Server service connects the VTrak GUI to the VTrak subsystem  
though your browser.  
To change the Web Server settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Web Server Setting link.  
4. Enter the HTTP Port number.  
80 is the default.  
5. Enter Session Time Out interval.  
24 minutes is the default.  
6. If you want to use a secure connection, check the Enable SSL box.  
7. If you checked the Enable SSL box, enter a HTTPS Port number.  
443 is the default.  
8. If you want to download a SSL Certificate, check the Download Certificate  
box.  
9. If you checked the Download Certificate box, enter the Certificate filename  
or click on the Browse... button to locate it.  
10. When you are done, click on the Submit button.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
11. Click OK in the confirmation box to restart the Web Server service with your  
changes.  
Change Start Setting  
To change the Web Server Automatic/Manual start setting:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Web Server Setting link.  
4. Under Startup Type:  
•
Click on the Automatic option to start the service automatically during  
system startup.  
•
Click on the Manual option to start the service manually (the service  
does not start during system startup).  
5. Click on the Submit button.  
Manual Start, Restart, Stop  
To manually start, restart or stop the Web Server service:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Web Server Setting link.  
4. Under Running Status:  
•
•
If the service is stopped, click the Start button to start the service.  
If the service is started, click the Stop button to stop the service.  
Or click on the Restart button to restart the service.  
Telnet  
VTrak’s Telnet service enables you to access VTrak’s Command Line Interface  
(CLI) through a network connection.  
To change the Telnet settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Telnet Setting link.  
4. Enter the Telnet Port number.  
2300 is the default.  
5. Enter the Maximum Number of Connections.  
4 is the default.  
6. Enter the Session Time Out interval.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
24 minutes is the default.  
7. When you are done, click on the Submit button.  
8. Click OK in the confirmation box to restart the Telnet service with your  
changes.  
Change Start Setting  
To change the Telnet Automatic/Manual start setting:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Telnet Setting link.  
4. Under Startup Type:  
icon.  
•
Click on the Automatic option to start the service automatically during  
system startup.  
•
Click on the Manual option to start the service manually (the service  
does not start during system startup).  
5. Click on the Submit button.  
Manual Start, Restart, Stop  
To manually start, restart or stop the Telnet service:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Telnet Setting link.  
4. Under Running Status:  
icon.  
•
•
If the service is stopped, click the Start button to start the service.  
If the service is started, click the Stop button to stop the service.  
Or click on the Restart button to restart the service.  
SNMP  
VTrak's SNMP service enables the SNMP browser to obtain information from the  
VTrak. The Trap Sink is where SNMP events are sent and can be viewed.  
To change the SNMP settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the SNMP Management link.  
4. Enter the SNMP Port number.  
161 is the default.  
5. Enter a System Name.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
There is no default name.  
6. Enter a System Location.  
USA is the default.  
7. Enter a System Contact (the email address of the administrator or other  
individual).  
8. Enter the Read Community  
Public is the default.  
9. Enter the Write Community  
Private is the default.  
10. Enter a Trap Sink IP address.  
11. Select a Trap Filter and click on its option.  
12. Tap sinks of the selected Severity level and above will be sent.  
13. Click on the Update button and review your Trap Sinks.  
14. When you are done, click on the Submit button.  
15. Click OK in the confirmation box to restart the SNMP service with your  
changes.  
Change Start Setting  
To change the SNMP Automatic/Manual start setting:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the SNMP Management link.  
4. Under Startup Type:  
•
Click on the Automatic option to start the service automatically during  
system startup.  
•
Click on the Manual option to start the service manually (the service  
does not start during system startup).  
5. Click on the Submit button.  
Manual Start, Restart, Stop  
To manually start, restart or stop the SNMP service:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the SNMP Management link.  
4. Under Running Status:  
•
•
If the service is stopped, click the Start button to start the service.  
If the service is started, click the Stop button to stop the service.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Or click on the Restart button to restart the service.  
CIM  
VTrak’s CIM service provides a database for information about computer  
systems and network devices. CIM enables you to access VTrak's controller  
using a CIMOM browser.  
This service is normally Stopped and set to Manual start.  
Change Start Setting  
To change the CIM startup settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the CIM Setting link.  
4. Under Startup Type:  
•
Click on the Automatic option to start the service automatically during  
system startup.  
•
Click on the Manual option to start the service manually (the service  
does not start during system startup).  
5. Click on the Submit button.  
Manual Start, Restart, Stop  
To manually start, restart or stop the CIM service:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the CIM Setting link.  
4. Under Running Status:  
•
•
If the service is stopped, click the Start button to start the service.  
If the service is started, click the Stop button to stop the service.  
Or click on the Restart button to restart the service.  
CIM Service Settings  
To change the CIM service settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
icon.  
3. Click on the CIM Setting link.  
4. To enable CIM using a HTTP connection:  
•
•
Choose the Yes option  
Enter a port number in the field provided (5988 is the default)  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
5. To enable CIM using a HTTPS connection:  
•
•
Choose the Yes option  
Enter a port number in the field provided (5989 is the default)  
6. To enable authentication for your CIM connection(s):  
•
•
•
Choose the Yes option  
Enter the old password in the field provided (password is the default)  
Enter a new password in the field provided  
To change your password, the CIM service must be running. See “Manual  
Start, Restart, Stop” on page 106.  
The default name is cim. You cannot change the name or add users.  
7. Click on the Submit button.  
Netsend  
VTrak’s Netsend service sends VTrak subsystem events in the form of text  
messages to your Host PC and other networked PCs. In order to use Netsend:  
•
•
•
Netsend must be running on the VTrak  
You must provide the IP address for each recipient PC  
The Messenger service must be running on each recipient PC  
Note  
If your Netsend and Messenger service settings are correct but  
the recipient PC does not receive event messages, check the  
recipient PC’s Firewall settings. Refer to your OS documentation  
for more information.  
Manual Start, Restart, Stop  
To manually start, restart or stop the Netsend service:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree view.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Administration Tools  
3. Click on the Netsend link.  
4. Under Running Status:  
•
•
If the service is stopped, click the Start button to start the service.  
If the service is started, click the Stop button to stop the service. Or click  
on the Restart button to restart the service.  
Change Start Setting  
To change the Netsend Automatic/Manual start setting:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree view.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
2. Click on the Administration Tools  
3. Click on the Netsend link.  
4. Under Startup Type:  
icon.  
•
Click on the Automatic option to start the service automatically during  
system startup.  
•
Click on the Manual option to start the service manually (the service  
does not start during system startup).  
5. Click on the Submit button.  
Add Recipients  
To add recipients of Netsend messages:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree view.  
2. Click on the Administration Tools  
3. Click on the Netsend link.  
icon.  
4. Enter the recipient PC’s IP address in the Recipient IP Address field.  
5. Under Recipient filter, select the lowest level of Severity to be reported for  
each event.  
The selected level plus all higher levels of Severity will be reported:  
•
•
•
•
•
Information – Information only, no action is required  
Warning – User can decide whether or not action is required  
Minor – Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time  
Major – Action is needed now  
Critical – Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are  
serious  
•
Fatal – Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred  
6. Click the Update button to add the new recipient to the list  
7. When you are done, click on the Submit button.  
Delete Recipients  
To delete recipients of Netsend messages:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree view.  
2. Click on the Administration Tools  
3. Click on the Netsend link.  
icon.  
4. Highlight the recipient you want to delete in the recipient list.  
5. Click the Delete button to remove the recipient from the list.  
6. When you are done, click on the Submit button.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Export  
The Software Management–Export tab enables you to export the User Database  
file from the VTrak subsystem to the Host PC. From there, you can import the  
User Database file to other VTrak subsystems so that all have the same User  
information and settings. To export the User Database file from this subsystem:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Software Management  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Export tab in Management View.  
5. Under the Type dropdown list, select User Database.  
6. Click on the Export button.  
7. In the File Download Security Warning box, click the Save button.  
8. In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the directory where you want to save  
the User Database.  
9. Enter a name for the User Database (“export” is the default file name).  
10. Click the Save button.  
Note  
The Encryption box is grayed out. Encryption is always enabled.  
Import  
The Software Management–Import tab enables you to import the User Database  
file from the Host PC's file system to the VTrak subsystem. When you make user  
settings to one VTrak, you can export the User Database file to the Host PC.  
From there, you can import the User Database file to other VTraks so that all  
have the same User information and settings.  
Caution  
Do NOT use this function to update the VTrak firmware.  
To import the User Database file to this subsystem:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Software Management  
109  
icon.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
4. Click on the Import tab.  
5. Under the Type dropdown list, select User Database.  
6. Enter the name of the file to be imported.  
Or, click the Browse... button to search for the file.  
7. Click on the Submit button.  
8. Click on the Next button.  
If the imported file is a valid user database, an warning will appear to inform  
you that it will overwrite the previous settings.  
9. Click on the OK button.  
This user settings are applied to this VTrak subsystem.  
Note  
The Decryption box is grayed out. Decryption is always enabled.  
Firmware Update  
The Software Management–Firmware Update tab enables you update the  
firmware on the VTrak subsystem. See “Firmware Update – WebPAM PROe” on  
page 217 for this procedure.  
Restore Factory Defaults  
VTrak includes a function to restore the default settings to its Firmware and  
Software settings.  
Caution  
The action of restoring default settings can disrupt your VTrak  
functions. Use this feature only when necessary and only on the  
settings that must reset to default in order to set them correctly.  
To access the Restore Defaults feature:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
The Administrative Tools list appears.  
3. Click the Restore Factory Defaults link at the bottom of the list in  
Management View.  
The Restore Factory Defaults screen appears.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
4. Check the Firmware and Software functions you want to restore to default  
settings.  
5. Click on the Submit button.  
6. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
7. Click the OK button.  
The functions you selected will be automatically restored to their default settings.  
Clear Statistics  
The Clear Statistics function clears statistical data on controllers, physical drives,  
and logical drives. To clear statistical data:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
icon.  
3. Click on the Clear Statistics link.  
The Clear Statistics tab appears in Management View.  
4. Click on the Submit button.  
5. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
6. Click the OK button.  
Shutdown and Restart  
The Shutdown and Restart function enables you to:  
•
•
Shut down the subsystem  
Shut down and restart the subsystem  
You can only do part of this function in WebPAM PROe. Additional action is  
required, as described below. If you want to monitor the shutdown or restart  
process, see the notes below.  
Shutdown  
To shutdown the subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Shutdown link in Management View.  
A Shutdown or Restart tab will appear.  
4. On the Shutdown or Restart tab, select Shutdown from the dropdown menu.  
5. Click the Submit button.  
6. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
7. Click the OK button.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
When the controller shuts down, your WebPAM PROe connection will be  
lost.  
8. Wait for no less than two minutes.  
9. Manually turn off the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem.  
Monitor the Shutdown  
To monitor a shutdown, you must use the Command Line Interface (CLI) though  
a serial connection to the VTrak.  
At the “administrator@CLI>” prompt, type shutdown -a shutdown.  
When the “Shutdown complete. It is now safe to power off the subsystem.”  
message appears, turn off the power supply switches.  
Restart the Subsystem  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Shutdown link in Management View.  
A Shutdown or Restart tab will appear.  
4. On the Shutdown or Restart tab, select Restart from the dropdown menu.  
5. Click the Submit button.  
6. In the warning box, click the OK button.  
7. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
8. Click the OK button.  
When the controller shuts down, your WebPAM PROe connection will be  
lost.  
9. Wait for two to three minutes.  
10. In your browser, log into WebPAM PROe once again.  
If you cannot log in, wait for 30 seconds, and try again. Repeat until login is  
successful.  
Monitor the Restart  
To monitor a restart, you must use the Command Line Interface (CLI) though a  
serial connection to the VTrak.  
At the “administrator@CLI>” prompt, type shutdown -a restart.  
When the “Login:” prompt appears, the restart is finished.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Controllers  
The Controllers–Information tab provides information about the controllers in a  
VTrak subsystem. Controller information includes:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controller ID (1 or 2)  
Alias, if assigned  
Status – OK means normal  
Vendor  
Model  
Revision Number  
WWN – World Wide Name of the controller  
To identify the VTrak subsystem housing this controller:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click the Controllers  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
3. Click on the Locate Controller button.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The Controller Status  
LED and Dirty Cache  
LED on the back of the  
Controller, will flash for one minute. See the illustration below.  
LEDs (Fibre Channel)  
LEDs (iSCSI)  
LEDs (SCSI)  
Figure 6. The Controller Status and Dirty Cache LEDs flash for one minute  
so you can identify the Controller  
Controller  
Controller Information  
The Controller–Information tab provides information about a specific VTrak  
subsystem controller. This information is useful for maintenance and  
troubleshooting. To access Controller information:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click the Controllers  
3. Click on the Controller  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Information tab in Management View.  
The Controller information includes:  
•
•
•
Controller ID (1 or 2)  
Alias, if assigned*  
Vendor  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Model  
Status  
Power On Time  
Cache Usage (percent)  
Dirty Cache Usage (percent)  
Part number  
Serial number  
Hardware revision number  
WWN (World Wide Name)  
Date of manufacture  
SCSI protocols supported  
Boot loader Version  
Boot loader Build Date  
Firmware Version number  
Firmware Build Date  
Software Version number  
•
Software Build Date  
Note  
You can make setting adjustments to the items marked with an  
asterisk (*). Click the Settings tab for access.  
Advanced Controller Information includes:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Memory Type – Controller’s data cache  
Memory Size  
Flash Type – Stores firmware, software, and user configurations  
Flash Size  
NVRAM Type – Stores parameters, settings, and tables  
NVRAM Size  
Preferred Cache Line Size – See “Cache Policy” on page 251.  
Cache Line Size – See “Cache Policy” on page 251  
Coercion – See “Capacity Coercion” on page 252  
Coercion Method – See “Capacity Coercion” on page 252  
SMART – Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting System for physical  
drives.  
•
SMART Polling Interval  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
Write Back Cache Flush Interval  
Controller Statistics  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click the Controllers  
3. Click on the Controller  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Information tab in Management View and select Statistics from  
dropdown menu.  
The Controller statistics include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Data transferred (read and write)  
Read Data transferred  
Write Data transferred  
Errors (total)  
Non-read/write errors  
Read errors  
Write errors  
I/O requests (total)  
Non-read/write I/O requests  
Read I/O requests  
Write I/O requests  
Statistics start time  
Statistics collection time  
Clear Statistics  
To clear statistics, see “Clear Statistics” on page 111.  
Controller Settings  
The Controller–Settings tab enables you to make Controller settings. To make  
Controller settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click the Controllers  
3. Click on the Controller  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Settings tab in Management View.  
5. Enter a name into the Alias field.  
Maximum of 48 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,  
and underscore. An alias is optional.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
6. Check the SMART Log box to enable the Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and  
Reporting System (SMART).  
7. Enter a polling interval (1 to 1440 minutes) in SMART Polling Interval field.  
8. Check the Coercion Enabled box to enable disk drive capacity coercion.  
When disk drives of different capacities are used in the same array, coercion  
reduces the usable capacity of the larger disk drive(s) in order to match the  
smallest capacity drive.  
For more information, see “Capacity Coercion” on page 252.  
9. Select a coercion method from the Coercion Method dropdown menu. The  
choices are:  
•
•
•
•
GB Truncate – (Default) Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest  
1,000,000,000 byte boundary.  
10GB Truncate – Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest  
10,000,000,000 byte boundary.  
Group Rounding – Uses an algorithm to determine how much to  
truncate. Results in the maximum amount of usable drive capacity.  
Table Rounding – Applies a predefined table to determine how much to  
truncate.  
10. Enter a time interval (1 to 12 seconds) in the Write Back Cache Flush  
Interval field.  
For more information, see “Cache Policy” on page 251.  
11. Select a Cache Line Size (8KB or 64KB) from the Preferred Cache Line Size  
dropdown menu.  
For more information, see “Cache Line Size” on page 252.  
12. Click the Submit button.  
The changes take effect immediately.  
Enclosures  
The Enclosures–Information tab provides component information about the  
VTrak subsystem enclosure, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Enclosure ID number  
Number of power supply units  
Number of fans  
Number of blowers – Blowers are scroll fans, 2 in each cooling unit  
Number of physical drive slots – 15, 12 or 8 depending on the VTrak model  
Number of temperature sensors – The number of sensors varies among  
VTrak models  
•
Number of voltage sensors – 3.3V, 5.0V, and 12.0V  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
Number of batteries – One for each controller in the enclosure  
Identify Enclosure  
To identify the VTrak subsystem enclosure:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Locate Enclosure button.  
The FRU LEDs on the back of the enclosure will flash for one minute.  
Storage Enclosure  
Processor (SEP)  
RAID Controller  
Controller  
Mgmt  
FC  
1
FC  
2
IOIOI  
1
2
Power Supply  
Cooling Unit  
with Battery  
Cooling Unit Power Supply  
Figure 7. The VTrak M500f is show above, The M500i/p are similar.  
Cooling Unit  
with Battery  
Controller  
iSCSI  
1
iSCSI  
2
Mgmt  
IOIOI  
Power Supply 1  
RAID  
Controller  
Storage  
Enclosure  
Processor  
(SEP)  
Power Supply 2  
Figure 8. The VTrak M300i/M200i is shown above. The VTrak M300f/p and  
M200f/p are similar.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Enclosure  
Enclosure Information  
The Enclosure–Information tab provides a diagram showing the status and  
location of key components. Status information about the VTrak subsystem  
enclosure, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SEP Firmware Version  
Polling Interval*  
Enclosure Warning and Critical temperature thresholds*  
Controller Warning and Critical temperature thresholds*  
Power Supply Units – Device ID, Status, Fan status, and Fan speed  
Blowers (scroll fans in the cooling unit(s) – Device ID, Status, and Speed  
Voltage Sensors – 3.3V, 5.0V, and 12.0V  
Temperature Sensors – The number of sensors varies among VTrak models  
To access Controller information:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
For information on Enclosure problems, see “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on  
page 261.  
Enclosure Settings  
The Enclosure–Settings tab enables you to make settings for certain components  
of the VTrak subsystem enclosure. To make Enclosure settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Settings tab in Management View.  
5. Enter a polling interval (15 to 255 seconds) in the Polling Interval field.  
6. Enter a value in the Enclosure Warning Temperature Threshold field (45°C is  
the default).  
7. Enter a value in the Enclosure Critical Temperature Threshold field (51°C is  
the default).  
8. Enter a value in the Controller Warning Temperature Threshold field (63°C is  
the default).  
9. Enter a value in the Controller Critical Temperature Threshold field (68°C is  
the default).  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
10. Click the Submit button.  
The changes take effect immediately.  
FRU VPD  
The Enclosure–FRU VPD tab displays Vital Product Data (VPD) information  
about Field Replaceable Units (FRU) in the VTrak subsystem enclosure,  
including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controller Motherboard  
Storage Enclosure Processor (SEP)  
Battery Backup Unit (BBU)  
Cooling Units  
Power Supply Units  
Back Plane  
Controller Daughter Card Battery  
Use this information when communicating with Technical Support and when  
ordering replacement units. For contact information, see “Contact Technical  
Support” on page 299.  
To access Controller information:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the FRU VPD tab in Management View.  
Battery  
The Enclosure–Battery tab displays information about the cache backup battery  
(or batteries) in the VTrak subsystem enclosure, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Device ID  
Status – Fully Charged is normal  
Remaining Capacity in percent  
Temperature – 40°C or lower is normal  
Reconditioning cycle count  
Voltage – 4000 mV or higher is normal  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
Current – A flow of a few mA is normal  
Note  
If a battery does not reflect normal conditions and it is not currently  
under reconditioning, run the Recondition function before you  
replace the battery. During Reconditioning, the battery is fully  
discharged then fully recharged. During that time, the controller  
cache is reset to Write Thru. If the battery does not maintain  
normal values after a Recondition, replace the battery. See  
page 230 and page 233 for more information.  
Battery Recondition  
VTrak automatically reconditions the battery every two months. To set the  
recondition schedule, see “Scheduler” on page 72.  
To recondition the battery do the following:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Battery tab in Management View.  
5. From the Battery tab dropdown menu, select Recondition.  
6. Click the Submit button.  
During reconditioning, Battery status can show “discharging” and  
“recharging”, and a value will display next to Current. Reconditioning runs in  
the background and stops automatically upon completion.  
Buzzer  
The Enclosure–Buzzer tab enables you to change audible settings for the VTrak  
subsystem enclosure. The buzzer sounds to inform you that the VTrak needs  
attention.  
Silence Buzzer  
To silence the Buzzer for the current event only, do the following:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Buzzer tab in Management View.  
5. From the Buzzer tab dropdown menu, select Settings.  
6. Uncheck the Buzzer Sounding box.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
7. Click the Submit button.  
The Buzzer goes silent for the current event. If the Buzzer is enabled, it will  
sound again when the next event happens.  
Change Buzzer Settings  
To change Buzzer settings, do the following:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Buzzer tab in Management View.  
5. From the Buzzer tab dropdown menu, select Settings.  
6. Check the Buzzer Enabled box to enable the buzzer for all events.  
7. Check the Buzzer Sounding box to enable the buzzer the current event only.  
8. Click the Submit button.  
The setting is changed immediately.  
Physical Drives  
The Physical Drives–Information tab provides information about the physical disk  
drives installed in the VTrak subsystem enclosure, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Device ID – PD plus the slot number where the drive is installed.  
Model – Drive Manufacturer's model name and/or number.  
Configurable Capacity – Configurable Capacity of this physical drive in GB.  
Location – Enclosure number and Slot number.  
Operational Status – OK is normal. Can also show Rebuilding or Dead.  
Configuration Status – The array to which the drive is assigned or its spare  
designation.  
To view more information about a specific physical drive, click the Device ID link.  
Identify a Physical Drive  
To identify physical drive in the VTrak subsystem enclosure:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Physical Drives  
icon.  
5. In Management View, click on the physical drives in the graphic.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
The Disk Status LED will flash to identify the carrier holding the drive.  
Disk Status  
Figure 9. VTrak M500f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
Disk Status  
Figure 10.VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
Physical Drives Settings  
The Physical Drives–Settings tab provides enables you to make settings that  
apply to all of the physical disk drives installed in the VTrak subsystem enclosure.  
To make physical drive settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Physical Drives  
icon.  
5. Click on the Settings tab in Management View.  
6. To enable the disk drives’ Write Caches, check the Write Cached Enabled  
box.  
7. To enable the disk drives’ Read Ahead Caches, check the Read Look Ahead  
Enabled box.  
8. Select a DMA Mode from the dropdown menu.  
SATA drive use UDMA 5.  
9. To enable Command Queuing, check the Command Queuing Enabled box.  
This feature only affects disk drives that support Command Queuing.  
10. Click the Submit button.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Physical Drive  
The Physical Drive–Information tab provides information about the selected  
physical disk drive:  
Physical Drive Information  
•
•
•
•
•
Device ID – PD plus the slot number where the drive is installed.  
Location – By enclosure and slot numbers.  
Alias – If an alias has been assigned.  
Physical Capacity – Theoretical capacity of the drive in GB.  
Configurable Capacity – Capacity of the drive in GB actually available for  
use.  
•
Used Capacity – Capacity in GB lost to coercion or the difference between  
physical and configurable capacity.  
•
•
Block Size – The size of the stripe blocks on this physical drive.  
Operational Status – OK is normal. Can also show Rebuilding, Forced  
Online, Forced Offline, Transition Running, PDM Running, Media Patrol  
Running, Stale, PFA, Offline or Dead.  
•
Configuration Status – The array to which the drive is assigned or its spare  
designation, including Unconfigured, Stale, PFA, Global Spare, Dedicated  
Spare, Revertible Global Spare, Revertible Dedicated Spare.  
•
•
•
•
•
Model – Drive Manufacturer's model name and/or number.  
Drive Type – 3 Gb/s SATAII or 1.5 Gb/s SATA 1.0.  
Serial Number – From the drive manufacturer.  
Firmware Version – From the drive manufacturer.  
Protocol Version – From the drive manufacturer.  
Advanced Physical Drive Information  
•
•
•
Write Cache – Enabled or disabled as selected on the Physical Drives  
Settings tab.  
Read Look Ahead (Cache) – Enabled or disabled as selected on the  
Physical Drives Settings tab.  
SMART Feature Set – Enabled or disabled as selected on the Controller  
Settings tab.  
•
•
•
•
•
SMART Self Test – Supported or not supported by this drive.  
SMART Error Logging – Supported or not supported by this drive.  
Command Queuing Support – NCQ or TCQ supported by this drive.  
Command Queuing – Enabled or disabled.  
Queue Depth – Number of commands the buffer can hold. Command  
Queuing must be enabled.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
•
Maximum Ultra DMA Mode Supported – UDMA5 for SATA drives.  
Ultra DMA Mode – Mode as selected on the Physical Drives Settings tab.  
Physical Drive Statistics  
From the Information Tab, click on the dropdown menu, and select Statistics to  
view statistical information about this physical drive. This information can help  
you understand the amount of work a physical drive has done and whether it is  
functioning properly.  
•
•
•
•
•
Data Transferred – Total amount of data transferred  
Read Data Transferred – Amount of Read data transferred  
Write Data Transferred – Amount of Write data transferred  
Errors – Total number of all errors  
Non Read/Write Errors – Number of errors that were not for a Read or Write  
operation  
•
•
•
•
Read Errors – Number of read errors  
Write Errors – Number of write errors  
IO Request – Total number of all IO requests  
Non Read/Write IO Request – Number of IO requests that were not for a  
Read or Write operation  
•
•
•
•
Read IO Request – Total number of Read IO requests  
Write IO Request – Total number of Write IO requests  
Statistics Start Time – Time and date when this data began to be collected  
Statistics Collection Time – Time and date you clicked the Statistics link to  
display this data  
Identify a Physical Drive  
To identify physical drive in the VTrak subsystem enclosure:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Physical Drives  
icon.  
5. Click on a Physical Drive icon.  
6. In Management View, click on the physical drives in the graphic.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The Disk Status LED will flash to identify the carrier holding the drive.  
Disk Status  
Figure 11. VTrak M500f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
Disk Status  
Figure 12.VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
Physical Drive Settings  
The Physical Drive–Settings tab enables you to specify an alias for a physical  
disk drive. To make physical drive settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Physical Drives  
icon.  
5. Click on a Physical Drive icon.  
6. Click on the Settings tab in Management View.  
7. Type an alias into the Physical Drive Alias field.  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,  
and underscore. An alias is optional.  
8. Click the Submit button.  
Clear Physical Drive Conditions  
The Physical Drive–Clear tab enables you to clear certain conditions from a  
physical drive. The Clear tab only appears when those conditions are present.  
•
Stale – The physical drive contains obsolete disk array information.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
PFA – The physical drive has errors resulting in a prediction of failure.  
Note  
Be sure you have corrected the condition by a physical drive  
replacement, rebuild operation, etc., first. Then clear the condition  
in the GUI.  
To clear a Stale or PFA status from a physical drive:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
4. Click on the Physical Drives  
icon.  
5. Click on a Physical Drive icon.  
6. In Management View, click on the Clear tab.  
7. In the Confirmation box, click OK to confirm.  
Note  
If a physical drive has both a Stale and a PFA condition, click the  
Clear tab once to clear the Stale condition, then click again to clear  
the PFA condition.  
Force a Physical Drive Offline/Online  
The Physical Drive–Force Offline/Online tab enables you to force an:  
•
•
Online physical drive to go Offline  
Offline physical drive to go Online  
The Force Offline/Online tab appears only for physical drives that are assigned to  
disk arrays.  
Caution  
Forcing a physical drive offline or online is likely to cause data  
loss. Back up your data before you proceed. Use these functions  
only when required.  
To force a physical drive offline:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Enclosures  
3. Click on the Enclosure  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
icon.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
4. Click on the Physical Drives  
icon.  
5. Click on a Physical Drive icon.  
6. Click on the Force Offline/Online tab in Management View.  
7. Click the Submit button.  
8. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
9. Click the OK button.  
Physical Drive Media Patrol  
Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media  
on each disk drive. Media Patrol checks all physical drives assigned to disk  
arrays. Media Patrol does not check unconfigured drives.  
Media Patrol will also check spare drives, if those drives have Media Patrol  
enabled. Media Patrol for spare drives is enabled by default. You can disable it in  
VTrak's Command Line Interface (CLI).  
Unlike Synchronization and Redundancy Check, Media Patrol is concerned with  
the condition of the media itself, not the data recorded on the media. If Media  
Patrol encounters a critical error, it triggers PDM if PDM is enabled.  
To run Media Patrol, do the following:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click on the Background Activities tab in Management View.  
3. From the Background Activities dropdown menu, select Start Media Patrol.  
4. Click the Start button.  
To set Media Patrol priority, see “Change Background Settings” on page 71.  
Disk Arrays  
A disk array is a collection of physical drives in a RAID. Logical drives are made  
from disk arrays. The Disk Arrays–Information tab displays a list of disk arrays  
along with their status and capacity:  
•
•
•
•
Device ID – This is the unique ID number assigned to an individual disk array  
Alias – A user-specified name for the disk array  
Status – This refers to functional status of this disk array. OK is normal  
Configurable Capacity – This is the data storage capacity available for new  
and existing logical drives  
•
Free Capacity – This is the data storage capacity available for new logical  
drives  
To see more information about a specific disk array, click on its Device ID link.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
To access the Disk Arrays–Information tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
Create a Disk Array – Automatic  
The Disk Array Automatic Creation option enables you to create a new disk array  
following a default set of parameters. One logical drive will be made automatically  
when you create the disk array. To create a Disk Array using the Automatic  
function:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Create tab in Management View.  
4. From the Create tab dropdown menu, select Automatic.  
The following parameters display:  
•
Disk Arrays – The number of physical drives in the disk array, their slot  
numbers, configurable capacity, and the number of logical drives to be  
created  
•
•
Logical Drives – The ID number of the logical drive(s), their RAID level,  
capacity, and stripe size  
Spare Drives – The physical drive slot number of the dedicated hot  
spare assigned to this disk array. A hot spare drive is created for all  
RAID levels except RAID 0, when five or more unconfigured physical  
drives are available  
5. If you accept these parameters, click the Submit button.  
The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List on the Information tab.  
If you do NOT accept these parameters, use the Advanced option to create  
your disk array.  
The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List on the Information tab.  
Create a Disk Array – Express  
The Disk Array Express Creation option enables you to choose the parameters  
for a new disk array by specifying the characteristics you want. With this method,  
you can create multiple logical drives at the same time you create your disk array.  
However, all of the logical drives will be the same.  
If you prefer to specific the parameters directly, use the Advanced option to  
create your disk array.  
If you are uncertain about choosing parameters for your disk array, use the  
Automatic option.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
To create a new disk array:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
3. Click on the Create tab in Management View.  
4. From the Create tab dropdown menu, select Express.  
5. Check the boxes to select any one or combination of the following:  
•
•
•
•
Redundancy – The array will remain available if a physical drive fails  
Capacity – The greatest possible amount of data capacity  
Performance – The highest possible read/write speed  
Spare Drive – A hot spare drive is created when you select Redundancy,  
Spare Drive, and five or more unconfigured physical drives are available  
6. In the Number of Logical Drives field, enter the number of logical drives you  
want to make from this disk array.  
7. From the Application Type menu, select an application that best describes  
your intended use for this disk array:  
•
•
•
•
•
File Server  
Video Stream  
Transaction Data  
Transaction Log  
Other  
8. Click the Update button.  
Or check the Automatic Update box and updates will occur automatically.  
The following parameters display:  
•
Disk Arrays – The number of physical drives in the disk array, their slot  
numbers, configurable capacity, and the number of logical drives to be  
created  
•
•
Logical Drives – The slot number of the logical drive(s), their RAID level,  
capacity, and stripe size  
Spare Drives – The physical drive slot number of the dedicated hot  
spare assigned to this disk array (all RAID levels except RAID 0)  
If you accept these parameters, proceed to the next step.  
If you do NOT accept these parameters, review and modify your selections  
in the previous steps.  
9. When you are done, click the Submit button.  
The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List on the Information tab.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Create a Disk Array – Advanced  
The Disk Array Advanced Creation option enables you to directly specify all  
parameters for a new disk array. One logical drive will be made automatically  
when you create the disk array. If you select less than the total available capacity,  
you can use the remaining space to create additional logical drives at a later time.  
If you are uncertain about choosing parameters for your disk array, use the  
Express or Automatic option to create your disk array.  
To create a new disk array:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Create tab in Management View.  
4. From the Create tab dropdown menu, select Advanced.  
Step 1 – Disk Array Creation  
5. Enter a name for the disk array in the field provided.  
6. Check the box if you want to enable Media Patrol.  
For more information, see “Media Patrol” on page 257.  
7. Check the box if you want to enable PDM.  
For more information, see “Predictive Data Migration (PDM)” on page 257.  
8. Highlight physical drives you want in the disk array from the Available list and  
press the >> button to move them to the Selected list.  
You can also double-click them to move them.  
9. When you are done, click the Next button.  
Step 2 – Logical Drive Creation  
Logical Drive Creation enables you to specify logical drives under the new disk  
array. Enter the information for a logical drive, then click the Update button. If  
there is free capacity remaining, you can specify another logical drive now or wait  
until later.  
10. Choose a RAID level for the logical drive from the dropdown menu.  
The choice of RAID levels depends on the number of physical drives you  
selected.  
11. RAID 50 only – Specify the number of axles for your array.  
For more information on axles, see “RAID 50 – Striping of Distributed Parity”  
on page 245.  
12. Specify a Capacity and the unit of measure (MB, GB, TB).  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
This value will be the data capacity of the first logical drive in your new disk  
array. If you specify less than disk array's maximum capacity, the remainder  
will be available for additional logical drives which you can create later.  
13. Specify a Stripe size from the dropdown menu.  
8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256 KB, and 1 MB are available. 64 KB is the default.  
14. Specify a Sector size from the dropdown menu.  
512 B, 1, 2, and 4 KB are available. 512 B is the default.  
15. Specify a Read (cache) Policy from the dropdown menu.  
Read Cache, Read Ahead Cache, and No Cache are available. Read Ahead  
is the default.  
16. Specify a Write (cache) Policy from the dropdown menu.  
Write Back and Write Through (Thru) are available. Write Back is the default.  
17. Click the Update button.  
A new logical drive is displayed under New Logical Drives.  
Repeat the above steps to specify additional logical drives as desired.  
18. When you are done specifying logical drives, click the Next button.  
Step 3 – Summary  
The Summary lists the disk array and logical drive information you specified.  
19. To proceed with disk array and logical drive creation, click the Submit  
button.  
The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List on the Information tab.  
Note  
This function does not automatically create a hot spare drive. After  
the disk array is created, you can create a hot spare drive for it.  
For more information, see “Create Spare Drive” on page 151.  
Delete a Disk Array  
The Disk Arrays–Delete tab enables you to delete existing disk arrays.  
Caution  
If you delete a disk array, you also delete any logical drives that  
belong to it, along with the data in those logical drives. Back up  
any important data before deleting a disk array.  
To delete a disk array:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
icon.  
3. Click on the Delete tab in Management View.  
4. Check the box to the left of the disk array you want to delete.  
5. Click the Submit button.  
6. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
7. Click the OK button.  
The selected disk array disappears from the Disk Array List on the Information  
tab.  
Disk Array  
The Disk Array–Information tab gives a description and reports the status of the  
physical drives and logical drives that belong to this disk array. A disk array is a  
collection of physical drives in a RAID. Logical drives are made from disk arrays.  
To access the Disk Array–Information tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
Disk Array Information  
•
Disk Array ID – This is the ID number assigned by the VTrak GUI for this disk  
array.  
•
•
Alias – Optional.  
Operational Status – OK, Synchronizing, Rebuilding, Degraded, Offline or  
Transport Ready (see definitions below).  
•
•
Total Physical Capacity – The theoretical data storage capacity without  
regard to capacity coercion.  
Configurable Capacity – The actual data storage capacity available for new  
and existing logical drives.  
•
•
Free Capacity – The data storage capacity available for new logical drives.  
Max Contiguous Free Capacity – The maximum contiguous data storage  
capacity available for new logical drives.  
•
•
•
Media Patrol – Enabled or disabled.  
PDM – Enabled or disabled.  
Number of Physical Drives – The number of physical drives that belong to  
this disk array.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
Number of Logical Drives – The number of logical drives that belong to this  
disk array.  
Supported RAID Level – The RAID levels this disk array can support.  
Physical Drives in the Disk Array  
•
•
•
•
Slot No. – Physical drive ID number.  
Model – The physical drive's model name from the manufacturer.  
Type – SATA or PATA.  
Configurable Capacity – This is the available data storage capacity of this  
physical drive.  
•
Status – OK is normal. Can also show Rebuilding, Forced Online, Forced  
Offline, Transition Running, PDM Running, Media Patrol Running, Stale,  
PFA, Offline or Dead (see definitions below).  
Logical Drives in the Disk Array  
•
Device ID – This is the ID number of a logical drive that belongs to this disk  
array.  
•
•
•
•
Alias – Optional.  
RAID Level – This is the RAID level of this logical drive.  
Capacity – This is the available data storage capacity of this physical drive.  
Status – Functional, Synchronizing, Rebuilding, Critical, or Offline (see  
below).  
Disk Array Status  
•
Functional/OK – This is the normal state of a logical drive. When a logical  
drive is Functional, it is ready for immediate use. For RAID Levels other than  
RAID 0 (Striping), the logical drive has full redundancy.  
•
Synchronizing – This condition is temporary. Synchronizing is a maintenance  
function that verifies the integrity of data and redundancy in the logical drive.  
When a logical drive is Synchronizing, it will function and your data is  
available. However, access will be slower due to the synchronizing  
operation.  
•
•
Critical/Degraded – This condition arises as the result of a physical drive  
failure. A degraded logical drive will still function and your data is still  
available. However, the logical drive has lost redundancy (fault tolerance).  
You must determine the cause of the problem and correct it.  
Rebuilding – This condition is temporary. When a physical drive has been  
replaced, the logical drive automatically begins rebuilding in order to restore  
redundancy (fault tolerance). When a logical drive is rebuilding, it will  
function and your data is available. However, access will be slower due to  
the rebuilding operation.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
Transport Ready – After you perform a successful Prepare for Transport  
operation, this condition means you can remove the physical drives of this  
disk array and move them to another enclosure or different drive slots. After  
you relocate the physical drives, the disk array status will show OK.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Forced Offline – This drive was forced offline by the user.  
Forced Online – This drive was forced online by the user.  
Transition Running – A Transition is running that involves this physical drive.  
PDM Running – PDM is running on this physical drive.  
Media Patrol Running – Media Patrol is running on this physical drive.  
Stale – The physical drive contains obsolete disk array information. Click on  
the Clear tab.  
•
•
PFA – The physical drive has errors resulting in a prediction of failure. Click  
on the Clear tab.  
Offline – This condition arises as the result of a second physical drive failure.  
An Offline logical drive is not accessible but some or all of your data may  
remain intact. You must determine the cause of the problem and correct it.  
•
Dead – The physical drive has failed.  
Disk Array Settings  
The Disk Array–Settings tab enables you to assign an alias to this disk array and  
also enable or disable Media Patrol and PDM. To make Disk Array settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click on the Settings tab in Management View.  
5. Enter an alias in the Disk Array Alias field.  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,  
and underscore. An alias is optional.  
6. To enable Media Patrol support, check the Media Patrol box.  
7. To enable PDM support, check the PDM box.  
8. Click the Submit button.  
Create a Logical Drive  
The Disk Array–Create LD tab enables you to create additional logical drives  
under this disk array. When you create a disk array, you automatically create one  
logical drive also. If the initial logical drive used less than the full capacity of the  
disk array, you can create additional logical drives from the same disk array.  
To create a logical drive:  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click on the Create LD tab in Management View.  
5. Enter an alias (name) in the Alias field.  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,  
and underscore. An alias is optional.  
6. From the RAID Level dropdown list, select a RAID level for this logical drive.  
All RAID levels supported by the disk array appear in the list. See “Choosing  
a RAID Level” on page 247.  
7. Enter a capacity and select unit of measure (MB, GB, TB).  
The default value is the available capacity of the disk array. You can use this  
value or any lesser amount.  
8. From the Stripe dropdown menu, select a Stripe size for this logical drive.  
The choices are 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 KB, and 1 MB. 64 KB is the  
default. See “Stripe Size” on page 250.  
9. From the Sector dropdown menu, select a Sector size for this logical drive.  
The choices are 512 B, 1, 2, and 4 KB. 512 B is the default. See “Sector  
Size” on page 250.  
10. From the Read Policy dropdown menu, select a Read Cache policy for this  
logical drive.  
The choices are Read Cache, Read Ahead, and No (read) Cache. Read  
Ahead is the default. See “Cache Policy” on page 251.  
11. From the Write Policy dropdown menu, select a Write Cache policy for this  
logical drive.  
The choices are Write Through (thru) and Write Back. Write Back is the  
default. If you selected No Cache under Read Cache, this setting will be  
Write Through. See “Cache Policy” on page 251.  
12. Click the Update button to enter the logical drive parameters.  
13. Review the results. If there is remaining space on the disk array, you can  
create another logical drive, following the steps above. Each logical drive  
can have a different set of parameters.  
14. Click the Next button when you are done.  
A new window displays with the disk array information and the proposed  
logical drives with their parameters.  
15. Click the Submit button create the logical drives.  
The new logical drive appears in the Logical Drive List on the Information tab.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
If you created a fault-tolerant logical drive (any RAID level except RAID 0), the  
Operational Status of new logical drive will display Synchronizing for several  
minutes after creation. You can use the logical drive during this period but read/  
write performance could be slower than normal. See “Logical Drive  
Synchronization” on page 146.  
Delete a Logical Drive  
The Disk Array–Delete LD tab enables you to delete a logical drive under this  
disk array.  
Caution  
All data on the logical drive will be lost. Back up any valuable data  
before deleting the logical drive.  
To delete a logical drive:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click on the Delete LD tab in Management View.  
5. Check the box to the left of the logical drive you want to delete.  
6. Click the Submit button.  
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
7. Click the OK button.  
The selected logical disappears from the Logical Drive List on the Information  
tab.  
Disk Array Migration  
For VTrak, the term “Disk Array Migration” means either or both of the following:  
•
•
Change the RAID Level  
Expand the storage capacity  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
For a list of Migration options and other important information, see “RAID Level  
Migration” on page 254.  
Notes  
•
•
You can add physical drives to a RAID 50 array but you  
cannot change the number of axles.  
If you add an odd number of physical drives to a RAID 10  
array, it will become a RAID 1E array by default.  
To Migrate an existing disk array:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click the Background Activities tab in Management view.  
5. From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, select Start  
Migration.  
6. Under Capacity Usage, if there is more than one Disk Array, click on the one  
you want to Migrate.  
7. Select a new RAID Level, if desired.  
8. To expand the disk array's capacity, check the Expand Capacity box.  
9. If you checked the Expand Capacity box, enter a number into the Capacity  
field and select the appropriate unit of measure (MB, GB, TB).  
10. Click on the Update button.  
The information under Capacity Usage changes to reflect your choices.  
11. If you agree with the changes, click on the Next button.  
12. Click on the Submit button to begin Migration.  
To set Migration priority, see “Change Background Settings” on page 71.  
Disk Array Rebuild  
When you rebuild a disk array, you are actually rebuilding the data on one disk  
drive. Normally, a disk array would rebuild itself using a hot disk drive, after going  
Critical. However, if the Auto Rebuild function is disabled or no spare drives are  
available, you must initiate the procedure.  
To enable Auto Rebuild, see “Background Activities” on page 71.  
To create a spare drive, see “Create Spare Drive” on page 151.  
For more information, see “Hot Spare Drive(s)” on page 253.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Manual Rebuild  
If a physical drive has failed, identify and replace the drive, then rebuild the disk  
array as described below:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
If there are multiple disk arrays, choose the icon with the yellow !.  
4. Click on the Background Activities tab in Management View.  
5. Click the dropdown menu on the Background Activity tab and select Start  
Rebuild.  
6. Select the Source physical drive.  
This is a remaining functional physical drive in the disk array.  
7. Select the Target physical drive.  
This is the replacement physical drive.  
8. Click the Submit button.  
The Disk Array Background Activity tab will show the rebuild on the replacement  
(target) physical drive. Depending on the size of the physical disk involved, this  
process will take some time.  
To view more information, click on the Rebuild on PDx link.  
To set Rebuild priority, see “Change Background Settings” on page 71.  
Disk Array Background Activity  
The Disk Array–Background Activity tab provides information about functions that  
run in the background on your subsystem:  
•
•
•
•
Disk array Migration  
Disk array Rebuild  
Predictive Data Migration (PDM)  
Spare drive Transition  
Start Background Function  
To start a background function:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click the Background Activities tab in Management view.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
5. From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, choose the  
function you want to start.  
View Progress of Background Function  
To view the progress of the current background activity and a list of activities in  
the queue:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Background Activities tab in Management view.  
To view more information, click on the activity link.  
To pause a background activity, click on the activity link, then click the Pause  
button. To resume again, click the Resume button.  
To cancel a background activity, click on the activity link, then click the Stop  
button.  
Transition  
Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive that is currently part  
of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non-revertible spare. The  
revertible spare drive returns to its original status. For more information, see  
“Transition” on page 258.  
In order to run the Transition function, the spare drive must be Revertible. In  
addition, you must specify an unconfigured physical drive of the same or larger  
capacity to replace the revertible spare drive.  
To run Transition, do the following:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click on the Background Activities tab in Management View.  
3. From the Background Activities dropdown menu, select Start Transition.  
4. Select an unconfigured physical drive from the list of available drives.  
After Transition is completed, refresh the screen. The revertible spare drive will  
be listed under the Spare Drives icon and the disk array’s operational status will  
show OK.  
To set Transition priority, see “Change Background Settings” on page 71.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Transport  
The Disk Array–Transport tab enables you to prepare a disk array for transport.  
Important  
Before you can use this feature:  
•
There must be a dedicated spare disk drive assigned to this  
disk array.  
•
The disk array Operational Status must be OK.  
To prepare a disk array for transport:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click the Transport tab in Management View.  
5. Click on the Submit button.  
6. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
7. Click the OK button.  
8. After the Transition is complete, move the physical drives comprising the  
disk array to their new locations.  
9. Click the Refresh button in your Browser.  
The drives appear in their new locations and disk array status displays.  
Logical Drives  
The Logical Drives–Information tab displays a list of logical drives along with their  
status and capacity. Logical drives are made from disk arrays. To access the  
Logical Drives–Information tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click on the Logical Drives  
icon  
The Information tab displays the following:  
•
•
Device ID – This is the unique ID number assigned to an individual logical  
drive.  
Alias – Optional.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
RAID Level – The RAID level of this logical drive (It may differ from the disk  
array).  
•
•
Capacity – This is the data storage capacity available.  
Disk Array ID – The ID number of the disk array from which this logical drive  
was created.  
•
•
•
Stripe – The stripe size of the logical drive.  
Sector –The sector size of the logical drive.  
Status –The operational status of the logical drive (see below).  
Logical Drive Status  
•
•
Functional/OK – This is the normal state of a logical drive. When a logical  
drive is Functional, it is ready for immediate use. For RAID Levels other than  
RAID 0 (Striping), the logical drive has full redundancy.  
Synchronizing – This condition is temporary. Synchronizing is a maintenance  
function that verifies the integrity of data and redundancy in the logical drive.  
When a logical drive is Synchronizing, it will function and your data is  
available. However, access will be slower due to the synchronizing  
operation.  
•
•
Critical/Degraded – This condition arises as the result of a physical drive  
failure. A degraded logical drive will still function and your data is still  
available. However, the logical drive has lost redundancy (fault tolerance).  
You must determine the cause of the problem and correct it.  
Rebuilding – This condition is temporary. When a physical drive has been  
replaced, the logical drive automatically begins rebuilding in order to restore  
redundancy (fault tolerance). When a logical drive is rebuilding, it will  
function and your data is available. However, access will be slower due to  
the rebuilding operation.  
•
Transport Ready – After you perform a successful Prepare for Transport  
operation, this condition means you can remove the physical drives of this  
disk array and move them to another enclosure or different drive slots. After  
you relocate the physical drives, the disk array status will show OK.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Forced Offline – This drive was forced offline by the user.  
Forced Online – This drive was forced online by the user.  
Transition Running – A Transition is running that involves this physical drive.  
PDM Running – PDM is running on this physical drive.  
Media Patrol Running – Media Patrol is running on this physical drive.  
Stale – The physical drive contains obsolete disk array information. Click on  
the Clear tab.  
•
PFA – The physical drive has errors resulting in a prediction of failure. Click  
on the Clear tab.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
•
Offline – This condition arises as the result of a second physical drive failure.  
An Offline logical drive is not accessible but some or all of your data may  
remain intact. You must determine the cause of the problem and correct it.  
Dead – The physical drive has failed.  
To create a logical drive, see “Create a Logical Drive” on page 135.  
To delete a logical drive, see “Delete a Logical Drive” on page 137.  
For a Degraded or Offline logical drive, see “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on  
page 286.  
Logical Drive  
The Logical Drive–Information tab displays a list of logical drives along with their  
status and capacity. Logical drives are made from disk arrays. To access the  
Logical Drives–Information tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click on the Logical Drives  
icon  
5. Click on the Logical Drive icon.  
To specify an Alias or set the Read and Write Policies, click on the Settings tab.  
Logical Drive Information  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Logical Drive ID – A number assigned to the logical drive by the system.  
Alias – Optional.  
RAID Level – The RAID level of this logical drive.  
Operations Status – The operational status of the logical drive (see below).  
Capacity – This is the data storage capacity of the logical drive.  
Physical Capacity – This is the data storage capacity of the physical drives  
used in the logical drive.  
•
•
Number of Axles – Each axle represents a physical drive.  
Number of Used Physical Drives – The number of physical drives used in  
this logical drive.  
•
•
•
Stripe Size – The stripe size of this logical drive.  
Sector Size – The sector size of this logical drive.  
Disk Array ID – The ID number of the disk array from which this logical drive  
was created.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
•
•
•
Read Policy – The Read Cache policy of this logical drive.  
Write Policy – The Write Cache policy of this logical drive.  
Serial Number – The Serial Number of this logical drive.  
WWN – The World Wide Number of this logical drive.  
Synchronized – Has this logical drive been synchronized? Yes or No.  
Logical Drive Statistics (in alphabetical order)  
•
Data Transferred  
•
•
•
Data Bytes  
Read Data Bytes  
Write Data Bytes  
•
Error Counts  
•
•
•
•
Errors  
Non-Read/Write Errors  
Read Errors  
Write Errors  
•
I/O Request Counts  
•
•
•
•
IO Request  
Non-Read/Write IO Request  
Read IO Request  
Write IO Request  
•
•
•
Session Received Counts  
Statistics Collection Date/Time  
Statistics Start Date/Time  
Logical Drive Settings  
The Logical Drive–Settings tab enables you to assign an alias and make cache  
settings to this logical drive. To make Logical Drive settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click on the Logical Drives  
icon  
5. Click on the Logical Drive icon.  
6. Click on the Settings tab in Management View.  
7. Enter an alias in the Logical Drive Alias field.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,  
and underscore. An alias is optional.  
8. From the Read Policy dropdown menu, select a Read Cache policy.  
The choices are Read Cache, Read Ahead, and No Cache.  
9. From the Write Policy dropdown menu, select a Write Cache policy.  
The choices are Write Back and Write Through (Thru). If you select No Read  
Cache, Write policy is automatically Write Through.  
10. Click the Submit button.  
Logical Drive Background Activity  
The Logical Drive–Background Activity tab provides information about functions  
that run in the background on this logical drive:  
•
•
Logical Drive Initialization  
Logical Drive Redundancy Check  
Logical Drive Initialization  
Initialization is done to logical drives after they are created from a disk array.  
Initialization sets all data bits in the logical drive to zero. The action is useful  
because there may be residual data on the logical drives left behind from earlier  
configurations. For this reason, Initialization is recommended for all new logical  
drives.  
Caution  
When you initialize a logical drive, all the data on the logical drive  
will be lost. Backup any important data before you initialize a  
logical drive.  
Initialize a Logical Drive:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Logical Drive Summary  
3. Click on the icon of the logical drive you want to Initialize.  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
You can also start Initialization from the Subsystem  
Activities tab  
icon Background  
4. Click on the Background Activities tab in Management View.  
5. From the Background Activities dropdown menu, select Initialization.  
6. To select Quick Initialization, check the box.  
If you checked the box, enter a value in the Quick Initialization Size field.  
This value is the size of the initialization blocks in MB.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
7. If you did not select Quick Initialization, enter a hexidecimal value in the  
Initialization Pattern in Hex field or use the default 00000000 value.  
8. Click the Submit button.  
9. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
10. Click the OK button.  
The Background Activity tab displays the progress of the Initialization.  
To set Initialization priority, see “Change Background Settings” on page 71.  
Logical Drive Redundancy Check  
Redundancy Check is a routine maintenance procedure for fault-tolerant disk  
arrays (those with redundancy) that ensures all the data matches exactly.  
Redundancy Check can also correct inconsistencies.  
Redundancy Check a Logical Drive  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Logical Drive Summary  
3. Click on the icon of the logical drive you want to Initialize.  
You can also start Redundancy check from the Subsystem  
Background Activities tab  
icon  
4. Click on the Background Activities tab in Management View.  
5. From the Background Activities dropdown menu, select Redundancy Check.  
6. To select Auto Fix, check the box.  
This feature attempts to repair the problem when it finds an error.  
7. To select Pause On Error, check the box.  
This feature stops the process when it finds an error.  
If Auto Fix is also checked, the process stops only when it finds a non-  
repairable error.  
8. Click the Submit button.  
The Background Activity tab displays the progress of the Redundancy Check.  
To set Redundancy Check priority, see “Change Background Settings” on  
page 71.  
Logical Drive Synchronization  
Synchronization is an automatic procedure applied to logical drives when they  
are created. Click on the logical drive icon and look under Logical Drive  
Information to see Synchronization. A Yes means the logical drive was  
synchronized.  
To set Synchronization priority, see “Change Background Settings” on page 71.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Logical Drive PDM  
Predictive Data Migration (PDM) is the migration of data from the suspect disk  
drive to a spare disk drive, similar to Rebuilding a Logical Drive. But unlike  
Rebuilding, PDM constantly monitors your disk drives, and automatically copies  
your data to a spare disk drive before the disk drive fails and your Logical Drive  
goes Critical. See “Predictive Data Migration (PDM)” on page 257.  
To run PDM, do the following:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click on the Background Activities tab in Management View.  
3. From the Background Activities dropdown menu, select Start PDM.  
4. From the Source Physical Drive dropdown menu, select a Source disk array.  
5. From the Target Physical Drive dropdown menu, select a Target physical  
drive.  
6. Click on the Submit button.  
A PDM link appears on the Background Activities tab and the percent completed  
displays.  
To set PDM priority, see “Change Background Settings” on page 71.  
Logical Drive Check Table  
The Logical Drive–Check Table tab enables you to view error tables. Use this  
information to evaluate the integrity of the logical drive and to determine whether  
corrective action is needed. To View the tables:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click on the Logical Drives  
icon  
5. Click on the Logical Drive icon.  
6. Click the Check Table tab in Management view.  
7. Click the option for the table you want to see.  
The default is All tables.  
If there are entries, they are listed as follows:  
•
•
Entry Number – A number assigned to each block of entry.  
Table Type – Read Check, Write Check or Inconsistent Block (see  
below).  
•
Start Logical Block Address – LBA of the first block for this entry.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
Count – Number of continuous blocks starting from this LBA.  
•
•
•
Read Check Table – Contains a list of read errors for this logical drive.  
Write Check Table – Contains a list of write errors for this logical drive.  
Inconsistent Block Table – Contains a list of inconsistent blocks for this  
logical drive. Mirror data for RAID Levels 1, 1E, and 10 or Parity data for  
RAID Levels 5 and 50, identified by the Redundancy Check (a  
background function).  
Logical Drive LUN Settings: iSCSI and Fibre Channel  
For iSCSI and Fibre Channel, LUN Masking is the process of applying a LUN  
Map so that each initiator can only access the LUNs specified for it.  
You must enable LUN Masking in order apply a LUN map. See page 98.  
To specify an iSCSI or a Fibre Channel LUN Map:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click on the Logical Drives  
icon  
5. Click on the Logical Drive icon.  
6. Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.  
7. From the Unassigned Initiator List, click on an initiator to select it.  
Or type the initiator name into the Initiator Name field.  
8. Type a LUN into the Map to LUN field.  
9. Click the Assign button.  
The initiator appears in the Assigned Initiator List.  
10. Click the Submit button.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Notes  
•
•
•
Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host  
system.  
The initiator name you input must match exactly in order for  
the connection to work.  
For iSCSI models, if iSNS is enabled, you can copy and paste  
the Initiator Name. Click on the iSCSI Management icon, then  
click on the iSNS tab dropdown menu and select Get  
Initiators. When the initiators display, highlight and copy the  
one you want and paste it into the Initiator Name field.  
LUN Mapping Parameters  
•
Initiator Name – For iSCSI, the initiator name is the iSCSI name of the  
initiator device and is composed of a single text string. iSCSI WWNs are  
somewhat different from regular WWNs.  
For Fibre Channel, the initiator name is the World Wide Port Name of the  
device and is composed of a series of eight, two-digit hexadecimal numbers.  
•
•
•
•
•
Alias – Optional. A common name for an iSCSI initiator  
Symbolic Name – Optional. A common name for a Fibre Channel initiator  
IP Address – IP address of the iSCSI port for this initiator  
Port ID – Port ID of the Fibre Channel port for this initiator  
LUN – Logical Unit Number on this logical drive for the selected initiator.  
You must enter different LUN numbers for each logical drive.  
Logical Drive LUN Settings: SCSI  
For SCSI, LUN Mapping is the process of applying a LUN Map so that each port  
can access the logical drive (target).  
You must enable a Target before you assign a LUN to it. See page 95.  
To specify a SCSI LUN Map:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Disk Arrays  
3. Click on the Disk Array  
icon.  
4. Click on the Logical Drives  
icon  
5. Click on the Logical Drive icon.  
6. Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
7. From the Assigned Channel List, click on Channel 1 or 2.  
The Channel ID number appears under LUN Assignment Worksheet.  
8. From the Target ID dropdown menu, select a Target ID number.  
Target IDs range from 0 to 15.  
9. From the LUN dropdown menu, select a LUN.  
LUNs range from 0 to 63. The number of available LUNs may be less,  
depending on the capability of your SCSI HBA card.  
You must enter different LUN numbers for each logical drive.  
10. Click the Assign button.  
11. Click the Submit button.  
LUN Mapping Parameters  
•
•
•
Channel ID – The VTrak controller SCSI ID number, 1 or 2  
Target ID – Active Target ID on this logical drive for the selected port.  
LUN – Logical Unit Number on this logical drive for the selected port.  
Spare Drives  
The Spare Drives–Information tab displays a list of Spare Drives along with their  
status, capacity, disk array assignment and Spare Check results. You must  
assign an unconfigured physical drive in order for it to function as a spare drive.  
When a physical drive in a disk array fails and a spare drive of adequate capacity  
is available, the disk array will begin to rebuild automatically using the spare  
drive. See “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 286.  
You must assign an unconfigured physical drive in order for it to function as a  
spare drive. See “Create Spare Drive” on page 151.  
To access the Spare Drives–Information tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Spare Drives  
The Spare Drives–Information tab displays a list of Spare Drives along with their  
status, capacity, disk array assignment and Spare Check results.  
•
•
ID – The unique ID number assigned to the spare drive.  
Operational Status – OK is normal. Can also show Rebuilding, Transition  
Running, PDM Running or Offline.  
•
•
Capacity – The data storage capacity of this spare drive.  
Revertible – Yes or No. A revertible spare drive automatically returns to its  
spare drive assignment after the failed physical drive in the disk array is  
replaced.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
•
•
•
Type – Global, can be used by any disk array. Dedicated, can only be used  
by the assigned disk array.  
Dedicated to Array – For dedicated spares, the disk array to which it is  
assigned. Global spares show N/A.  
Spare Check – The result of the Spare Check function. Healthy or Not  
Checked.  
To see more information about a specific spare drive, click on its Spare ID link.  
To identify unconfigured physical drives that you can assign to be spare drives,  
click the Physical Drives  
icon and look under Configuration Status.  
Create Spare Drive  
Note  
Be sure the spare drive you select has adequate capacity to  
replace the largest drive in each assigned disk array.  
To create a spare drive:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
2. Click on the Spare Drives  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
3. Click on the Create tab in Management View.  
4. Select a spare type, Global or Dedicated.  
Global can be used by any disk array. Dedicated can only be used by the  
assigned disk array  
5. To make a revertible spare drive, check the Revertible box.  
A revertible spare drive can be returned to spare drive status after it replaces  
a failed drive in a disk array. See “Transition” on page 258 for more  
information.  
6. Highlight physical drives you want in as a spare drive the Available list and  
press the >> button to move them to the Selected list.  
You can also double-click them to move them.  
7. If you selected a Dedicated spare drive, highlight disk array to which you  
want assign the spare drive from the Available list and press the >> button to  
move them to the Selected list.  
You can also double-click them to move them.  
8. Click the Update button.  
Your choices are displayed under New Hot Spare Drives.  
9. If you agree with the proposed choices, click the Submit button.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The new spare drive is added to the Spare Drive List on the Information tab.  
Delete Spare Drive  
The Spare Drives–Delete tab enables you to delete an existing spare drive.  
Note  
If an existing spare drive has the wrong parameters for your  
needs, click on the Settings tab to change the parameters rather  
than delete the spare drive and create a new one.  
To delete a spare drive:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Spare Drives  
3. Click on the Delete tab in Management View.  
4. Check the box to the left of the spare drive you want to delete.  
5. Click the Submit button.  
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
6. Click the OK button.  
The selected spare drive disappears from the Spare Drives List on the  
Information tab.  
Spare Check – All Spare Drives  
The Spare Drives–Spare Check tab enables you verify the status of your spare  
drives. To check a spare drive:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Spare Drives  
3. Click on the Spare Check tab in Management View.  
4. From the Physical Drive dropdown menu, select the spare drive you want to  
check.  
Or select All to check all the spare drives at the same time.  
5. Click the Submit button.  
The results of the Spare Check appear under Spare Check Status in the  
Information tab. “Healthy” means normal condition.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
Spare Drive  
Spare Drive Information  
When a physical drive in a disk array fails and a spare drive of adequate capacity  
is available, the disk array will begin to rebuild automatically using the spare  
drive. See “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 286.  
The Spare Drive–Information tab provides information about the selected  
physical disk drive.  
•
•
•
Spare ID – Consecutive number assigned when the spare drive was created.  
Physical Drive ID – The ID number of this physical drive.  
Spare Type – Global, can be used by any disk array. Dedicated, can only be  
used by the assigned disk array.  
•
•
Revertible – Yes or No. A revertible spare drive automatically returns to its  
spare drive assignment after the failed physical drive in the disk array is  
replaced.  
Spare Check Status – The result of the Spare Check function. Healthy or Not  
Checked.  
•
•
Physical Capacity – Theoretical capacity of the drive in GB.  
Configurable Capacity – Capacity of the drive in GB actually available for  
use.  
•
•
•
•
Block Size – Sector size in bytes.  
Drive Type – SATA or PATA.  
Model – Drive Manufacturer's model name and/or number.  
Location – The enclosure and slot number where the spare drive is  
physically installed.  
•
Configuration Status – Type of spare drive: Global, Revertible Global,  
Dedicated, Revertible Dedicated.  
•
•
•
Operational Status – OK is normal. Can also show Rebuilding or Offline.  
Serial Number – From the drive manufacturer.  
Firmware Version – From the drive manufacturer.  
Locate a Spare Drive  
To locate a spare drive in the VTrak subsystem enclosure:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Spare Drives  
3. Click on the Spare Drive icon.  
4. In Management View, click on the spare drive in the graphic.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The Disk Status LED will flash to identify the carrier holding the drive.  
Disk Status  
Figure 13.VTrak M500f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
Disk Status  
Figure 14.VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
Spare Drive Settings  
The Spare Drive–Settings tab enables you to change the settings of an existing  
spare drive. To change spare drive settings:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Spare Drives  
3. Click on the Spare Drive icon.  
4. Click on the Settings tab in Management View.  
5. Select a spare type, Global or Dedicated.  
Global can be used by any disk array. Dedicated can only be used by the  
assigned disk array  
6. To make a revertible spare drive, check the Revertible box.  
A revertible spare drive automatically returns to its spare drive assignment  
after the failed physical drive in the disk array is replaced.  
7. Highlight physical drives you want in the Available list and press the >>  
button to move them to the Selected list.  
You can also double-click them to move them.  
8. If you selected a Dedicated spare drive, highlight the disk array to which you  
want assign the spare drive from the Available list and press the >> button to  
move them to the Selected list.  
You can also double-click them to move them.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe  
9. Click on the Submit button.  
The new spare drive settings are shown in the Spare Drive List on the  
Information tab.  
Spare Check – Individual Spare Drive  
The Spare Drive–Spare Check tab enables you verify the status of the selected  
spare drive. To check the spare drive:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Spare Drives  
3. Click on the Spare Drive icon.  
4. Click on the Spare Check tab in Management View.  
5. Click the Submit button.  
The results of the Spare Check appear under Spare Check Status in the  
Information tab. “Healthy” means normal condition.  
Logical Drive Summary  
The Logical Drive Summary–Information tab displays a list of all logical drives in  
this VTrak enclosure, along with their status and capacity. See “Logical Drive  
Information” on page 143.  
To access the Logical Drive Summary–Information tab:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Drive Summary  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VTrak Status Indicators (below)  
Drive Status Indicators (page 159)  
Audible Alarm (page 160)  
•
Network Management (page 191)  
•
Fibre Channel Management  
(page 192)  
•
•
•
•
•
iSCSI Management (page 195)  
SCSI Management (page 198)  
Background Activity (page 199)  
Event Viewer (page 201)  
CLU Connection (page 161)  
CLU Function Map (page 164)  
Subsystem Management (page 173)  
Physical Drive Management  
(page 179)  
Additional Info and Management  
(page 202)  
•
•
Disk Array Management (page 182)  
•
Buzzer (page 214)  
Logical Drive Management  
(page 188)  
VTrak Status Indicators  
Even though the Command Line Utility (CLU) offers comprehensive monitoring of  
VTrak, the LED indicators on the VTrak unit provide important status information.  
When the power is switched on, the LEDs on the front of the VTrak will light up.  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI-2  
Activity  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI-1  
Activity  
Logical Drive  
Status  
FRU  
Status  
Controller  
Heartbeat  
Power  
Figure 1. VTrak M500f/i/p front panel LED display  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Power  
FRU Status  
Logical Drive Status  
FC/iSCSI/SCSI-1 Activity  
FC/iSCSI/SCSI-2 Activity  
Controller Heartbeat  
Figure 2. VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p front panel LED display  
When boot-up is finished and the VTrak is functioning normally:  
•
Controller LED blinks green once per second for five seconds, goes dark for  
ten seconds, then blinks green once per second for five seconds again.  
•
•
Power, FRU and Logical Drive LEDs display green continuously.  
Fibre Channel/iSCSI/SCSI LEDs flash green if there is activity on that  
channel.  
See the table below.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
State  
LEDs  
Steady  
Green  
Flashing  
Green  
Dark  
Amber  
Red  
Power  
FRU*  
System Off  
Normal  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Fan or  
Battery  
Problem  
Fan or  
Battery  
Failed  
System Off  
Normal  
n/a  
Logical  
Drive  
Logical  
Drive Critical DriveOffline  
Logical  
System Off  
No Activity  
Normal  
n/a  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI 1 or 2  
n/a  
n/a  
Activity  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Controller System Off  
Normal**  
“n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
* Field Replacement Unit. “n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
** Blinks five times in five seconds, five seconds dark, blinks five times again.  
See page 215 for more information about field-replaceable components.  
See page 286 for a discussion of critical and offline logical drives.  
Drive Status Indicators  
There are two LEDs on each Drive Carrier. They report the presence of power  
and a disk drive, and the current condition of the drive.  
Power/  
Disk Status  
Activity  
Figure 3. VTrak M500f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Disk Status  
Power/Activity  
Figure 4. VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
The VTrak spins up the disk drives sequentially in order to equalize power draw  
during start-up. After a few moments the Power/Activity and Disk Status LEDs  
should display green.  
State  
LEDs  
Steady  
Green  
Flashing  
Green  
Dark  
Amber  
Red  
Power/  
Activity  
Drive  
Present  
No Drive  
Activity  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
No Power/  
No Drive  
Drive  
Rebuilding  
Drive  
Error  
Status  
Drive OK  
“n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
See “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 286 for a discussion of rebuilding and  
failed disk drives.  
Audible Alarm  
VTrak’s alarm has five different patterns, as shown below.  
1x  
1
2
3
4
5
.25s .25s .25s  
.25s  
.75s  
.25s  
.75s  
.25s  
2.5s  
.25s .5s .25s  
6s  
2x  
.25s .25s .25s .5s .25s  
.75s  
.25s  
1s  
.25s  
1.25s  
s
.25s  
3s  
When you first power-up the VTrak, it beeps twice to show normal operation.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
The audible alarm sounds at other times to inform you that the VTrak needs  
attention. But the alarm does not specify the condition. When the alarm sounds,  
do the following:  
•
Check the front and back of VTrak for red or amber LEDs, as described  
above.  
•
•
If email notification is enabled, check for new messages.  
Check the different functions in the CLU for component problems.  
When a continuous tone sounds, there are multiple alarm patterns sounding at  
the same time.  
See “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on page 261 for diagnostic help.To make  
alarm settings, see “Buzzer” on page 214.  
CLU Connection  
There are two connections methods for the CLU:  
•
•
Serial – Requires a null modem cable (included with VTrak) to connect the  
serial ports on the Host PC and VTrak  
Telnet – Requires a network connection between the Host PC and VTrak’s  
Management Port.  
Serial Connection  
Before you begin, be sure the null modem cable is connected between the Host  
PC and VTrak, and that both machines are booted and running.  
1. Start your PC’s terminal emulation program.  
2. Press Enter once to launch the CLU.  
Telnet Connection  
If your Telnet connection has not been setup, refer to “Set Up Serial Cable  
Connections” on page 25.  
To start the telnet program:  
1. Go to the command line prompt (Windows) or click the terminal icon (Linux),  
then run:  
telnet 192.168.1.56 2300  
The IP address above is only an example. Use your VTrak's Management  
port IP address. 2300 is the Telnet port for the VTrak.  
The telnet login screen appears:  
2. At the Login prompt, type the user name and press Enter.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The default user name is administrator.  
3. At the Password prompt, type the password and press Enter.  
The default password is password.  
The CLI screen appears.  
4. At the CLI prompt, type menu and press Enter  
The CLU Main Menu appears.  
Quick Setup (Fibre Channel and SCSI) – A sequence of four steps to setup  
System Date & Time, Management Port and RAID Configuration  
Quick Setup (iSCSI) – A sequence of four steps to setup System Date & Time,  
Management Port, iSCSI Ports and RAID Configuration  
Subsystem Management – View controller information, lock/unlock the  
controller, set date and time, and monitor the enclosure.  
Physical Drive Management – View disk drive assignments and parameters,  
change disk drive cache settings and command queuing, and locate a physical  
drive.  
Disk Array Management – View disk array information, create and delete disk  
arrays, transport, rebuild, PDM, and transition functions, and locate a disk array,  
create and delete logical drives.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Logical Drive Management – View logical drive information, name logical  
drives, initialization and redundancy check, and locate a logical drive.  
Network Management (Fibre Channel and SCSI) – Set IP addresses for  
Management Port, gateway and DNS server; subnet mask.  
Network Management (iSCSI) – Set IP addresses for Management Port and  
iSCSI Ports, gateway and DNS server; subnet mask.  
Fibre Channel Management – Node information, Port information, settings,  
SFPs and statistics, list of initiators.  
iSCSI Management – Node settings, Port statistics, Session information, iSNS  
options, SLP options, CHAPs and Ping function.  
SCSI Management – Channel information, Enable/disable targets, Termination  
settings, Target information and statistics.  
Background Activity – Settings for Media Patrol, Auto Rebuild, Rebuild,  
Migration, PDM, Transition, Synchronization, Initialization, Redundancy Check  
rate and thresholds.  
Event Viewer – View the event logs.  
Additional Info and Management – Spare Drives, LUN Mapping, User  
management, EMail, SLP, Webserver, Telnet, SNMP, CIM, and Netsend settings,  
firmware flash, clear statistics and restore factory default settings.  
Buzzer – Enable, disable or silence the buzzer (audible alarm).  
Exit the CLU  
1. Highlight Return to Previous Menu and press Enter.  
Repeat this action until you arrive at the Main Menu.  
2. From the Main Menu, highlight Return to CLI and press Enter to exit  
3. Close the terminal emulation, Telnet or terminal window.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
CLU Function Map  
The map below is designed to help you navigate to the submenu where each  
function is located. Begin at the Main Menu. Highlight the next item in the path  
and press Enter. The paths in this map do not activate the functions.  
A
Alias, controller – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Controller Management,  
Controller Settings  
Alias, disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual disk array  
Alias, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual drive  
Alias, physical drive – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, individual drive  
Alias, subsystem – Main Menu, Subsystem Management  
ALPA, Fibre Channel – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre Channel  
Ports, Fibre Channel port, Fibre Channel Port Settings  
Auto Rebuild, enable/disable – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background  
Activity Settings  
B
Background Activity, in progress – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background  
Activities List  
Battery, recondition – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management, Batteries, individual Battery  
Blowers – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure Management  
Buzzer, settings – Main Menu, Buzzer  
C
Cache Settings, controller – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Controller  
Management, Controller Settings  
Cache Settings, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual  
logical drive  
Cache Settings, physical drive – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, Global  
Physical Drive Settings  
Channel, SCSI – Main Menu, SCSI Management  
CHAP, create/delete – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI CHAPS  
Check Tables, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual  
logical drive  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
C, continued  
CIM, settings – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Software  
Management, CIM  
Clear Events, runtime – Main Menu, Event Viewer, Clear Runtime Event Log  
Clear Events, non-volatile RAM – Main Menu, Event Viewer, NVRAM Events,  
Clear NVRAM Event Log  
Clear Statistics – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Clear Statistics  
Coercion Method, physical drives – Main Menu, Subsystem Management,  
Controller Management, individual Controller, Controller Settings  
Command Queuing – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, Global Physical  
Drive Settings  
Controller Management – Main Menu, Subsystem Management  
Controller Settings – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Controller  
Management, individual Controller, Controller Settings  
D
Date and Time, setting – Main Menu, Subsystem Management  
DHCP, iSCSI port – Main Menu, Network Management, iSCSI port, NetMgmt  
iSCSI Port Settings  
DHCP, management port – Main Menu, Network Management, management  
port, NetMgmt Ethernet Port Settings  
Disk Array, create/delete – Main Menu, Disk Array Management  
Disk Array, locate – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual disk array  
DMA Mode – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, Global Physical Drive  
Settings  
E
Email, settings – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Software  
Management, Email  
Enclosure, date and time – Main Menu, Subsystem Management  
Enclosure, locate – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management  
Enclosure, management – Main Menu, Subsystem Management  
Enclosure, settings – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
E, continued  
Enclosure, temperature – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management, Temperature Sensors  
Enclosure, voltage – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management, Voltage Sensors  
Error Block Threshold, RC – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background  
Activity Settings  
Event Log, runtime – Main Menu, Event Viewer  
Event Log, non-volatile RAM – Main Menu, Event Viewer, NVRAM Events  
F
Fans – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure Management  
Fibre Channel Port, settings – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre  
Channel Ports, Fibre Channel port, Fibre Channel Port Settings  
Flash through TFTP – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Flash  
through TFTP  
Force Offline/Online – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, individual drive  
FRU VPD – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure Management  
G
Gateway IP Address, iSCSI port – Main Menu, Network Management, iSCSI  
port, NetMgmt iSCSI Port Settings  
Gateway IP Address, management port – Main Menu, Network Management,  
management port, NetMgmt Ethernet Port Settings  
H
Hard ALPA, Fibre Channel – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre  
Channel Ports, Fibre Channel port, Fibre Channel Port Settings  
I
Inconsistent Block Table, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management,  
individual logical drive, Check Table  
Information, physical drive – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, individual  
drive  
Initialization, rate – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background Activity  
Settings  
Initialization, start/stop – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual  
logical drive, Background Activity  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
I, continued  
Initiator, create/delete – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, LUN  
Mapping  
Initiators, Fibre Channel – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre  
Channel Initiators  
IP Address, DNS Server – Main Menu, Network Management, iSCSI port,  
NetMgmt iSCSI Port Settings  
IP Address, iSCSI port – Main Menu, Network Management, iSCSI port,  
NetMgmt iSCSI Port Settings  
IP Address, management port – Main Menu, Network Management,  
management port, NetMgmt Ethernet Port Settings  
iSCSI, CHAP – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI CHAPS  
iSCSI iSNS Options – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI iSNS Options,  
iSNS port  
iSCSI Node, settings – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI Node  
iSCSI, ping – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, Ping  
iSCSI Port, settings – Main Menu, Network Management, iSCSI port, NetMgmt  
iSCSI Port Settings  
iSCSI Sessions – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI Sessions  
iSNS, options – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI iSNS Options, iSNS port  
L
Link Speed, Fibre Channel – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre  
Channel Ports, Fibre Channel port, Fibre Channel Port Settings  
Locate, disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual disk array  
Locate, enclosure – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management  
Locate, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual logical  
drive  
Locate, physical drive – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, individual drive  
Lock Management – Main Menu, Subsystem Management  
Logged In Devices, Fibre Channel – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management,  
Fibre Channel Ports, Fibre Channel port, Logged In Devices  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
L, continued  
Logical Drive, locate – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual logical  
drive  
Logical Drive, read cache – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual  
logical drive  
Logical Drive, write cache – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual  
logical drive  
Logical Drives, in disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual  
disk array  
LUN, assign to logical drive – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, LUN  
Mapping, SCSI channel  
LUNs – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, LUN Mapping  
LUN Masking, enable/disable – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management,  
LUN Mapping  
M
Management Port, settings – Main Menu, Network Management, management  
port, NetMgmt Ethernet Port Settings  
Media Patrol, enable/disable – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background  
Activity Settings  
Media Patrol, start/stop – Main Menu, Subsystem Management  
Migration, disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual Disk Array  
Migration, rate – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background Activity Settings  
N
Netsend, settings – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Software  
Management, Netsend  
Node, Fibre Channel – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre Channel  
Node  
Node, iSCSI – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI Node  
P
Password, user – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, User  
Management, individual User, Change Password...  
PDM, disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual disk array  
PDM, rate – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background Activity Settings  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
P, continued  
PFA Condition, clear – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, individual  
Physical Drive  
Physical Drives – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management  
Physical Drives, coercion method – Main Menu, Subsystem Management,  
Controller Management, individual Controller, Controller Settings  
Physical Drives, in disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual  
disk array  
Physical Drives, SMART settings – Main Menu, Subsystem Management,  
Controller Management, Controller Settings  
Ping, iSCSI – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, Ping  
Port, Fibre Channel – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre Channel  
Ports  
Port, iSCSI – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI Ports  
Power Supplies – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure Management  
R
Read Cache, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual  
logical drive  
Read Cache, physical drive – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, Global  
Physical Drive Settings  
Read Check Table, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management,  
individual logical drive, Check Table  
Reassigned Block Threshold, RC – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background  
Activity Settings  
Rebuild, disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual disk array  
Rebuild, rate – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background Activity Settings  
Redundancy Check, rate and settings – Main Menu, Background Activity,  
Background Activity Settings  
Redundancy Check, start/stop – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management,  
individual logical drive, Background Activity  
Restart – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Shutdown  
Restore Factory Defaults – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management,  
Restore Factory Defaults  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
S
Sessions, iSCSI – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI Sessions  
Settings, restore defaults – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management,  
Restore Factory Defaults  
SFP, Fibre Channel Port – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre  
Channel Ports, Fibre Channel port, Fibre Channel Port SFP  
Shutdown – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Shutdown  
SLP, iSCSI – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI SLP Options, SLP port  
SLP, settings – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Software  
Management, SLP  
SMART, enable/disable, settings – Main Menu, Subsystem Management,  
Controller Management, Controller Settings  
SNMP, settings – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Software  
Management, SNMP  
Software Management – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management  
Spare Drive, check – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Spare Drive  
Management, Spare drive  
Spare Drive, create/delete – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Spare  
Drive Management  
Spare Drive, settings – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Spare Drive  
Management, Spare drive  
Spare Drives, in disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual disk  
array  
Spare Drives, list – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Spare Drive  
Management  
Stale Condition, clear – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, individual  
Physical Drive  
Statistics, clear – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Clear Statistics  
Statistics, Controller – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Controller  
Management, individual Controller  
Statistics, Fibre Channel Port – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre  
Channel Ports, Fibre Channel port, Fibre Channel Port Statistics  
Statistics, iSCSI port – Main Menu, iSCSI Management, iSCSI Ports, iSCSI port  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
S, continued  
Statistics, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual  
logical drive  
Statistics, physical drive – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, individual  
drive  
Subnet Mask, iSCSI port – Main Menu, Network Management, iSCSI port,  
NetMgmt iSCSI Port Settings  
Subnet Mask, management port – Main Menu, Network Management,  
management port, NetMgmt Ethernet Port Settings  
Synchronization, rate – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background Activity  
Settings  
System Date & Time – Main Menu, Subsystem Management  
T
Target, assign to logical drive – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management,  
LUN Mapping, SCSI channel  
Telnet, settings – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Software  
Management, Telnet  
Temperature Sensors – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management  
Temperature, enclosure – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management, Temperature Sensors  
TFTP, flash – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Flash through TFTP  
Time and Date, setting – Main Menu, Subsystem Management  
Topology, Fibre Channel – Main Menu, Fibre Channel Management, Fibre  
Channel Ports, Fibre Channel port, Fibre Channel Port Settings  
Transition, disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual disk array  
Transition, rate – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background Activity Settings  
Transport, disk array – Main Menu, Disk Array Management, individual disk array  
Transport, rate – Main Menu, Background Activity, Background Activity Settings  
U
User, create/delete – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, User  
Management  
User, password – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, User  
Management, user from list  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
U, continued  
User, privilege – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, User  
Management, user from list  
User, settings – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, User  
Management, user from list  
User, status – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, User Management,  
user from list  
User Management – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management  
V
Voltage Sensors – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management  
Voltage, enclosure – Main Menu, Subsystem Management, Enclosure  
Management, Voltage Sensors  
W
Webserver, settings – Main Menu, Additional Info and Management, Software  
Management, Webserver  
Write Cache, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management, individual  
logical drive  
Write Cache, physical drive – Main Menu, Physical Drive Management, Global  
Physical Drive Settings  
Write Check Table, logical drive – Main Menu, Logical Drive Management,  
individual logical drive, Check Table  
This is the end of the CLU Function Map.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Quick Setup  
Quick Setup is discussed under “VTrak Setup with CLI or CLU” on page 29.  
Subsystem Management  
Subsystem Management includes, Alias, Media Patrol, Lock Management,  
System Date and Time, Controller Management and Enclosure Management.  
Alias  
An alias is optional. To set an Alias for this subsystem:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Type and alias into the Alias field.  
Maximum of 48 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words  
and underscore.  
3. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Media Patrol  
Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media  
on each disk drive. Media Patrol checks all physical drives assigned to disk  
arrays and spare drives. It does not check unconfigured drives.  
To start, stop, pause or resume Media Patrol:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Media Patrol and press enter.  
3. Highlight Start, Stop, Pause, or Resume and press Enter.  
4. If you chose Stop, press Y to confirm.  
Lock Management  
This function displays lock status and enables you to lock or unlock a subsystem  
controller. The lock prevents other sessions (including by the same user) from  
making a configuration change to the controller until the lock expires or a forced  
unlock is done. When the user who locked the controller logs out, the lock is  
automatically released.  
To access lock settings:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Lock Management and press Enter.  
To set the lock:  
1. In the Lock Time field, type a lock time in minutes.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
1440 minutes = 24 hours  
2. Highlight Lock and press Enter.  
To reset the lock with a new time:  
1. In the Lock Time field, type a lock time in minutes.  
1 to 1440 minutes (24 hours)  
2. Highlight Renew and press Enter.  
To release your own lock, highlight Unlock and press Enter.  
To release somebody else’s lock:  
1. Highlight Force Unlock and press the Spacebar to change to Yes.  
2. Highlight Unlock and press Enter.  
System Date and Time  
Use this screen to make Date and Time settings:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Modify System Date and Time and press Enter.  
3. Highlight the System Date or System Time setting.  
4. Press the backspace key to erase the current value.  
5. Type in a new value.  
6. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Controller Management  
Controller Management includes information, settings and statistics. To access  
Controller Management:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Controller Management and press Enter.  
3. Highlight the controller you want and press Enter.  
Basic Controller information displays.  
To access additional controller information, highlight Advanced Information and  
press Enter.  
To access controller statistics, highlight Controller Statistics and press Enter.  
Controller Settings  
Controller settings include controller alias, disk drive capacity coercion, cache  
line size and SMART settings. To access Controller settings:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
2. Highlight Controller Management and press Enter.  
3. Highlight the controller you want and press Enter.  
4. Highlight Controller Settings and press Enter.  
From this point, you can make settings to the Alias, Coercion and SMART  
functions.  
Alias  
An alias is optional. To set an Alias for this controller:  
1. Type and alias into the Alias field.  
Maximum of 48 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words  
and underscore.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Physical Drive Coercion  
Physical Drive Coercion is a function of the RAID system to adjust for physical  
drives of different sizes by reducing or coercing the capacity of the larger drives  
to match the smaller ones.  
To enable/disable coercion:  
1. Highlight Coercion and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and  
Disable.  
2. Highlight Coercion Method and press the spacebar to toggle through:  
•
•
•
GB Truncate – Reduces the capacity to the nearest 1 GB boundary  
10 GB Truncate – Reduces the capacity to the nearest 10 GB boundary  
Grp (group) Rounding – Uses an algorithm to determine truncation.  
Results in the maximum amount of usable drive capacity  
•
Table Rounding – Applies a predefined table to determine truncation  
3. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
SMART  
SMART is the Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting function of physical  
drives. The Controller polls the physical drives for problems and reports the  
results.  
To make SMART settings:  
1. Highlight SMART and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and  
Disable.  
2. Highlight SMART Poll Interval and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value.  
3. Type a new interval value in minutes.  
1 to 1440 minutes (24 hours)  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Enclosure Management  
Enclosure Management includes information, status, settings and location. To  
access Enclosure Management:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.  
To access FPU VPD information (vital product data on field replaceable units),  
highlight FPU VPD Information and press Enter.  
To access the current status of the power supplies, blowers, temperature or  
voltage sensors, highlight the item you want and press Enter.  
Enclosure Status  
Enclosure Management  
The current status of the power supplies, blowers, temperature or voltage  
sensors:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.  
3. Highlight power supplies, blowers, temperature or voltage sensors and press  
Enter.  
Power Supply Units  
This screen displays the operational and fan status of VTrak’s two power  
supplies.  
•
•
•
•
PSU (power supply unit) status – Should show Power On and Functional  
Fan Status – Should show Functional  
Healthy Threshold – Minimum acceptable fan speed  
Current Fan Speed – Should be greater than the Healthy Threshold value  
If any status differs from those listed above or the fan speed is below the Healthy  
Threshold value, there is a fan/power supply malfunction. See “Chapter 6:  
Maintenance” on page 215.  
Blowers  
This screen displays the status and speed of VTrak’s blowers. There are two  
blowers in each cooling unit. 500-series VTraks have two cooling units. 300- and  
200-series VTraks have one cooling unit.  
•
•
•
Blower status should be Functional  
Healthy Threshold – Minimum acceptable fan speed  
Current Speed – Should be greater than the Healthy Threshold value  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
If either blower speed is below the Healthy Threshold, there is a blower  
malfunction. See “Chapter 6: Maintenance” on page 215.  
Voltage Sensors  
There are three power supply circuits inside the VTrak.  
•
•
•
Voltage Sensor – Circuits: 3.3V, 5.0V, 12V  
Healthy Threshold – Normal voltage range for each circuit  
Current Voltage – Should be within the Healthy Threshold values  
If any voltage is outside the Healthy Threshold values, there is a voltage  
malfunction in the enclosure. See “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on page 261.  
Temperature Sensors  
The number and type of sensors depends on the VTrak model. Controller  
sensors normally run warmer than backplane sensors.  
•
•
•
•
Sensor number  
Location – Backplane or Controller  
Healthy Threshold – Maximum acceptable temperatures.  
Current Temperature – Should be less than the Healthy Threshold  
value.  
If any temperature exceeds the Healthy Threshold value, there is an overheat  
condition in the enclosure. See “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on page 261.  
Enclosure Settings  
Enclosure settings include internal sensor polling intervals and temperature  
thresholds. To access Enclosure settings:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Enclosure Settings and press Enter.  
From this point, you can make settings to the polling interval and  
temperature thresholds.  
Polling Interval  
Polling interval refers to the interval of time at which the Controller polls the  
Enclosure temperature sensors and reports their values.  
To make polling interval settings:  
1. Highlight Polling Interval and press the backspace key to erase the current  
value.  
2. Type a new interval value in seconds.  
15 to 255 seconds (4 minutes, 15 seconds)  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
3. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Temperature Thresholds  
Temperature thresholds are the temperature levels the Controller will report as a  
Warning or Critical. For most applications, the factory default settings are  
recommended.  
To change temperature thresholds:  
1. Highlight the Enclosure Temperature Warning threshold and press the  
backspace key to erase the current value.  
2. Type a new interval value in degrees C.  
Note the acceptable range of temperature values in the brackets. The default  
values are as follows:  
•
•
•
•
Enclosure Warning, 45°C  
Enclosure Critical, 51°C  
Controller Warning, 63°C  
Controller Critical, 68°C  
3. Do the same action to set the other thresholds.  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Batteries  
This feature enables you monitor and recondition the subsystem battery or  
batteries.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Batteries and press Enter.  
4. Highlight the battery you want to monitor and press Enter.  
5. Battery condition is expressed in the following items:  
•
Temperature Threshold Discharge – If battery exceeds this value while  
charging, replace the battery  
•
Battery Temperature – Should stay below charge and discharge  
thresholds  
•
•
Battery Voltage – Approximately 3900 mV is normal  
Battery Status – “FullyCharged” is normal. If it is says “Malfunction”,  
replace the battery  
•
•
Remaining Capacity – When status is “FullyCharged”, capacity should  
be at least 90%. If less, replace the battery  
Temperature Threshold Charge – If battery exceeds this value while  
charging, replace the battery  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
•
Battery Current – Positive during charge, negative during discharge  
To recondition the battery:  
1. Highlight Recondition Battery and press Enter.  
2. Press Y to confirm.  
Reconditioning the battery is a full discharge and recharge.  
Locate Enclosure  
This feature helps you identify the physical VTrak enclosure you are working with  
through the CLU.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Locate Enclosure and press Enter.  
The LEDs on the front of the VTrak will blink for one minute.  
Physical Drive Management  
Physical Drive Management includes global and individual settings for physical  
disk drives.  
Global Physical Drive Settings  
This screen enables you to make settings that apply to all physical drives in this  
VTrak enclosure.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Global Physical Drives Settings and press Enter.  
Write Cache  
This feature enables/disables the write cache on all physical drives.  
1. Highlight Write Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled  
and Disabled.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Read Ahead Cache  
This feature enables/disables the read ahead cache on all physical drives.  
1. Highlight Read Look Ahead Cache and press the spacebar to toggle  
between Enabled and Disabled.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
DMA Mode  
This feature switches between UDMA and MDMA modes on all physical drives.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
1. Highlight DMA Mode and press the spacebar to toggle through UDMA 0 – 5  
and MDMA 0 – 2.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Command Queuing  
This function enables/disables the command queuing on all physical drives that  
support this feature.  
1. Highlight CmdQueuing and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled  
and Disabled.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Individual Physical Drive Settings  
This screen enables you to make settings that apply to individual physical drives  
in this VTrak enclosure.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the physical drive of your choice and press Enter.  
Alias  
An alias is optional. To set an Alias for this physical drive:  
1. Type an alias into the Alias field.  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words  
and underscore.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Advanced Information  
To view advanced information about this physical drive, highlight Advanced  
Information and press Enter.  
Physical Drive Statistics  
To view the statistics for this physical drive, highlight Physical Drive Statistics and  
press Enter.  
Clear Stale and PFA Conditions  
The Clear Stale and Clear PFA functions only appear when those conditions exist  
on the physical drive.  
Highlight Clear Stale or Clear PFA and press Enter.  
If a physical drive is still online and shows a PFA error but “Clear PFA” does not  
appear, use PDM to copy the data to a new physical drive. Go to Disk Array Info  
and Settings.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
If a physical drive is offline and shows a PFA error, rebuild the disk array. Go to  
Disk Array Info and Settings. After rebuilding, the drive will show Stale. Run Clear  
Stale then run Clear PFA.  
If the physical drive with a PFA error is a spare, you must delete the drive as a  
spare, then Clear PFA will be available.  
After you clear a PFA error, watch for another PFA error to appear. If it does,  
replace the physical drive.  
Force Physical Drive Offline/Online  
The Physical Drive–Force Offline/Online function enables you to force an:  
•
•
Online physical drive to go Offline  
Offline physical drive to go Online  
The Force Offline/Online function appears only for physical drives that are  
assigned to disk arrays.  
Caution  
Forcing a physical drive offline or online is likely to cause data  
loss. Back up your data before you proceed. Use these functions  
only when required.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Global Physical Drives Settings and press Enter.  
3. Highlight the physical drive of your choice and press Enter.  
4. Highlight Force Offline or Force Online and press Enter.  
5. Press Y to confirm.  
Locate Physical Drive  
This feature helps you identify a physical drive within the VTrak enclosure you  
are working with through the CLU.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Global Physical Drives Settings and press Enter.  
3. Highlight the physical drive of your choice and press Enter.  
4. Highlight Locate Physical Drive and press Enter.  
The drive carrier LEDs on the front of the VTrak will blink for one minute.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Disk Array Management  
Disk Array Management includes the creation and deletion of disk arrays, disk  
array settings and functions, and also logical drive creation and deletion.  
Create a Disk Array  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Create New Array and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Configuration Method and press the spacebar to toggle through  
Automatic, Express, and Advanced.  
•
•
•
Automatic – Creates a default disk array and logical drive based on  
unconfigured physical drives in the system. No user choices. Go to  
“Automatic” below.  
Express – You select the RAID characteristics and type of application.  
Creates a disk array and logical drive(s) based on your input. Go to  
“Express” below.  
Advanced – You specify all parameters for a new disk array. One logical  
drive will be made automatically when you create the disk array. If you  
select less than the total available capacity, you can use the remaining  
space to create additional logical drives at a later time. Go to  
“Advanced” below.  
If you are uncertain about choosing parameters for your disk array, use  
the Express or Automatic option to create your disk array.  
Automatic  
Review the proposed configuration of disk array and logical drive(s).  
To accept the proposed configuration and create the disk array and logical  
drive(s), highlight Save Configuration and press Enter.  
To reject the proposed configuration, highlight Cancel Array Configuration and  
press Enter. You will return to the Disk Arrays Summary screen.  
To create a disk array with different characteristics, repeat the steps above  
specifying different parameters but choose the Express or Advanced option.  
Express  
1. Highlight Configuration Method and press to spacebar to select each of the  
following characteristics for your disk array:  
•
•
•
•
Redundancy  
Capacity  
Performance  
Spare Drive  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
2. Highlight Number of Logical Drives and press the backspace key to erase  
the current value.  
3. Enter the number of logical drives you want.  
4. Highlight Application Type and press the spacebar to toggle though the  
applications and select the best one for your disk array.  
•
•
•
•
•
File Server  
Video Stream  
Transaction Data  
Transaction Log  
Other  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings and move to the next screen.  
6. Review the proposed configuration of disk array and logical drive(s).  
To accept the proposed configuration and create the disk array and logical  
drive(s), highlight Save Configuration and press Enter.  
To reject the proposed configuration, highlight Cancel Array Configuration  
and press Enter. You will return to the Disk Arrays Summary screen.  
To create a disk array with different characteristics, highlight Create New  
Array and press Enter. Repeat the steps above specifying different  
parameters.  
Advanced  
For more information on the choices below, see “Chapter 7: Technology  
Background” on page 239.  
1. Choose whether to enable Media Patrol and PDM.  
2. If you want to specify an alias to the disk array, highlight Alias and type a  
name.  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words and  
underscore.  
3. Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter.  
4. Highlight a physical drive you want to add to your array and press the  
spacebar to select it.  
Repeat this action until you have selected all the physical drives for your  
array.  
5. Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter.  
6. If you want to specify an alias to the logical drive, highlight Alias and type a  
name.  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words and  
underscore.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
7. Highlight RAID Level and press the spacebar to toggle though a list of  
available RAID levels.  
8. If you want to create multiple logical drives, highlight Capacity, press the  
backspace key to remove the current value, then type a new smaller value.  
9. Highlight Stripe and press the spacebar to toggle through stripe sizes 8KB,  
16KB, 32KB, 64KB, 128KB, 256KB, 512KB, or 1MB.  
10. Highlight Sector and press the spacebar to toggle through sector sizes  
512B, 1KB, 2KB, or 4KB.  
11. Highlight Write Policy and press the spacebar to toggle write cache policy  
between WriteBack and WriteThru (write though).  
12. Highlight Read Policy and press the spacebar to toggle read cache policy  
though ReadCache, ReadAhead, and NoCache.  
13. Highlight Save Logical Drive and press Enter.  
14. Review logical drive(s) you are about to create for your new array. Then  
choose do one of the following:  
•
If you agree with the logical drive(s) as specified, highlight Complete  
Disk Array Creation and press Enter. A note will appear to remind you to  
set up LUN mapping for your new logical drive(s). Press any key to  
continue.  
•
•
If you specified less than the full capacity for the logical drive in the  
previous screen, and you want to add another logical drive now,  
highlight Create New Logical Drive and press Enter.  
If you do not agree with the logical drive(s), highlight Return to Previous  
Screen and press Enter to begin the process again.  
Delete a Disk Array  
Caution  
When you delete a disk array, you delete all the logical drives and  
the data they contain. Back up all important data before deleting a  
disk array.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the disk array you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.  
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.  
3. Highlight Delete Marked Arrays and press Enter.  
4. Press Y to confirm the deletion.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Disk Array Information  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.  
The information and settings screen appears.  
3. Highlight any of the following and press Enter to view a list of:  
•
•
•
Spare drives in this array, dedicated and global  
Physical drives in this array  
Logical drives in this array  
Disk Array Settings and Functions  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.  
The information and settings screen appears.  
Alias  
1. To set an alias for this disk array, highlight Alias and type an alias into the  
field.  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words and  
underscore. An alias is optional.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Media Patrol  
1. Highlight Media Patrol and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable  
and Disable.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
PDM  
1. Highlight PDM (Predictive Data Migration) and press the spacebar to toggle  
between Enable and Disable.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Transport  
This function prepares the physical drives in the disk array for moving to new  
drive slots.  
To run the Transport function, highlight Transport and press Enter.  
Rebuild  
This function rebuilds the disk array’s data onto a replacement physical drive.  
Use this function after a disk array has gone critical.  
1. Highlight Rebuild and press Enter.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
2. Specify the source and target physical drives.  
3. Highlight Start and press Enter.  
Migration  
This function includes RAID level migration (change existing array to a different  
RAID level or Online Capacity Expansion (add physical drives to an existing  
array). In order to migrate RAID level, you may have to add physical drives. For  
more information, see “RAID Level Migration” on page 254.  
1. Highlight Migration and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the physical drive you want to add and press the spacebar to select  
it.  
Repeat this action to add more physical drives.  
Notes  
•
•
You can add physical drives to a RAID 50 array but you  
cannot change the number of axles.  
If you add an odd number of physical drives to a RAID 10  
array, it will become a RAID 1E array by default.  
3. Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter.  
4. To change RAID level, Highlight the logical drive in the list and press Enter.  
5. Highlight RAID Level and press the spacebar to toggle through the available  
RAID levels.  
6. Highlight Capacity, press the backspace key to erase the current logical  
drive capacity and type in the new value.  
The new value must be equal or larger than the current capacity.  
7. Highlight Save Logical Drive and press Enter.  
The screen returns to Disk Array Migration Logical Drives.  
8. Highlight Complete Disk Array Migration and press Enter.  
9. In the confirmation message, press Y to confirm.  
The screen jumps to Disk Arrays Summary.  
Predictive Data Migration  
This function rebuilds the disk array’s data onto a replacement physical drive.  
Use this function after a disk array has gone critical. PDM must be enabled (see  
above).  
1. Highlight Predictive Data Migration and press Enter.  
2. Specify the source and target physical drives.  
3. Highlight Start and press Enter.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Transition  
Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive that is currently part  
of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non-revertible spare drive.  
The revertible spare drive will return to its original status. For more information,  
see “Transition” on page 258.  
In order to run Transition, the spare drive must be Revertible. In addition, you  
must specify an unconfigured physical drive of the same or larger capacity to  
replace the revertible spare drive.  
1. Highlight Transition and press Enter.  
2. Specify the source and target physical drives.  
3. Highlight Start and press Enter.  
Accept Incomplete Array  
This function appears when a physical drive was missing at startup.  
Highlight Accept Incomplete Array and press Enter to enable a Rebuild of the  
disk array.  
Do not use this function if the physical drive was manually removed from the  
enclosure.  
Locate Disk Array  
This feature helps you identify the physical drives assigned to the disk array you  
are working with in the CLU.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Locate Disk Array and press Enter.  
The drive carrier LEDs pertaining to this disk array will blink for one minute.  
Create a Logical Drive  
You can create logical drives on existing disk arrays if there is available space in  
the array. For more information on the choices below, see “Chapter 7:  
Technology Background” on page 239.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the disk array in which you want to create a logical drive and press  
Enter.  
3. Highlight Create New Logical Drive and press Enter.  
The Disk Array ID number and Maximum capacity available for the new  
logical drive are displayed.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
4. Highlight the following parameters and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value:  
•
Alias - Type an alias into the field, if desired. Maximum of 32 characters.  
Use letters, numbers, space between words and underscore.  
•
Capacity - Maximum capacity shown. Enter a smaller capacity if  
desired.  
5. Highlight the following parameters and press the spacebar to toggle though  
the available choices:  
•
Stripe size – Press the spacebar to select: 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512  
KB, or 1 MB  
•
•
•
Sector size – Press the spacebar to select: 512 B; 1, 2, 4 KB  
Write Policy – Press spacebar to select: Write Back or Write Through  
Read Policy – Press spacebar to select: No Cache, Read Cache, or  
Read Ahead Cache  
6. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Note  
If you did not use all of the available capacity of the disk array, you  
can create an additional logical drive at this point.  
Delete a Logical Drive  
Caution  
When you delete a logical drive, you delete all the data it contains.  
Back up all important data before deleting a logical drive.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the disk array that contains the logical drive you want to delete and  
press Enter.  
3. Highlight the logical drive you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark  
it.  
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.  
4. Highlight Delete Marked Logical Drives and press Enter.  
5. Press Y to confirm the deletion.  
Logical Drive Management  
This function deals with settings and functions of existing logical drives. To create  
or delete a logical drive, see “Disk Array Management” on page 182.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Logical Drive Information  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter.  
The information and settings screen appears.  
3. Highlight any of the following and press Enter to view more information:  
•
Check Table – Read Check, Write Check, and Inconsistency Check  
Tables  
•
Logical Drive Statistics  
Logical Drive Settings and Functions  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter.  
Alias  
1. To set an alias for this disk array, highlight Alias and type an alias into the  
field.  
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words and  
underscore. An alias is optional.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Write Cache Policy  
1. To set write cache policy for this disk array, highlight WritePolicy and press  
the spacebar to toggle between WriteBack and WriteThru (write though).  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Read Cache Policy  
1. To set read cache policy for this disk array, highlight ReadPolicy and press  
the spacebar to toggle though ReadCache, ReadAhead and None.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Initialization  
This function sets all data bits in the logical drive to zero.  
Caution  
When you initialize a logical drive, you delete all the data it  
contains. Back up all important data before initializing a logical  
drive.  
1. Highlight Background Activity and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Start Initialization and press Enter.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The initialization parameters appear.  
•
•
Initialization pattern. The default 00000000 is best for most applications  
Quick Initialization – Yes means only the disk data format of the logical  
drives are initialized.  
•
Quick Initialization Rate – Enter a value or use the default 64 bits.  
To change a parameter, highlight it and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value, then type the new value.  
3. Highlight Start and press Enter.  
If necessary, you can pause and resume or stop and restart the Initialization.  
You cannot access the logical drive until Initialization has finished.  
Redundancy Check  
This function is a maintenance procedure for logical drives in fault-tolerant disk  
arrays that ensures all the data matches exactly.  
1. Highlight Background Activity and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Start Redundancy Check and press Enter.  
The redundancy check parameters appear.  
•
•
Auto Fix – Corrects inconsistencies automatically  
Pause On Error – Pauses the Redundancy Check when an error is  
found  
To change a parameter, highlight it and press the backspace toggle between  
Yes and No.  
3. Highlight Start and press Enter.  
If necessary, you can pause and resume or stop and restart the Redundancy  
Check. You can use the logical drive while Redundancy Check is running.  
Locate Logical Drive  
This feature helps you identify the physical drives assigned to the logical drive  
you are working with in the CLU.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Locate Logical Drive and press Enter.  
The drive carrier LEDs pertaining to this logical drive will blink for one  
minute.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Network Management  
Network Management deals with network connections and settings for VTrak’s  
Management Port and, on iSCSI models, the iSCSI ports. The other parameters  
specific to iSCSI, see “iSCSI Management” on page 195.  
Management Port Settings  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Network Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the management or iSCSI port you want and press Enter.  
3. Highlight NetMgmt Ethernet Port Settings and press Enter  
The settings screen appears. You can enable DHCP or make settings  
manually.  
DHCP  
If you enable DHCP, IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway are set  
automatically.  
1. Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Manual  
1. Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.  
2. Highlight each of the following and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value, then type the new value.  
•
•
•
•
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway IP Address  
DNS Server IP Address  
3. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
iSCSI Port Settings  
This feature applies to VTrak iSCSI models only.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Network Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the iSCSI port you want and press Enter.  
3. Highlight NetMgmt iSCSI Port Settings and press Enter.  
The settings screen appears. You can enable DHCP or make settings  
manually.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
DHCP  
If you enable DHCP, IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway are set  
automatically.  
1. Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled.  
2. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Manual  
1. Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.  
2. Highlight each of the following and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value, then type the new value.  
•
•
•
•
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway IP Address  
DNS Server IP Address  
3. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Fibre Channel Management  
Fibre Channel Management deals with all Fibre Channel settings. This feature  
appears only with VTrak Fibre Channel models.  
Node  
These functions affect both VTrak Fibre Channel ports.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Fibre Channel Node and press Enter.  
Node information appears. There are no user settings on this screen.  
Ports  
These functions affect both VTrak Fibre Channel ports.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Fibre Channel Port 1 or Port 2 and press Enter.  
Port information appears.  
Logged-in Devices  
To see a list of devices logged-in to this port, highlight Logged In Devices and  
press Enter. If a Fibre Channel switch is attached, it will also appear in this list.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Port Settings  
1. Highlight Fibre Channel Port Settings and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the following parameters and press the spacebar to toggle though  
the choices:  
•
•
Configured Link Speed – 1GB, 2GB or Automatic selection  
Configured Topology – NL-Port (Arbitrated Loop), N-Port (Point to Point)  
or Automatic selection  
3. Highlight Hard ALPA and press the backspace key to erase the current  
value, then type the new value.  
The range is 0 to 255. 255 disables this feature.  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
The table below shows the type of attached topology you will achieve based on  
your connection type and the configured topology you select:  
Fibre Channel Attached Topology  
Configured Topology  
Connection Type  
Switch  
N-Port  
NL-Port  
Fabric Direct  
Point to Point  
Public Loop  
Private Loop  
Direct  
Example 1: If you connect the VTrak to a Fibre Channel switch and select NL-  
Port topology, you will create a Public Loop attached topology.  
Example 2: If you have a Point to Point attached topology, you made a direct  
connection (no switch) and selected N-port topology.  
Note  
In some cases, HBA settings to N-Port only work if connected to  
the switch. Refer to your HBA manual for more information.  
Port SFP  
This screen displays the following information about the SFPs (small form-factor  
plugable transceivers). There are no user settings on this screen.  
•
•
•
Connector type  
Bitrate  
Link Length – Maximum length depending on the type of fiber or copper  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transceiver type  
Transceiver code  
Manufacturing Date – Year, month, day format  
Vendor Name – Vendor name of the SFP transceiver  
Vendor OUI – Organizational Unique Identifier, part of the MAC address  
Vendor Part Number  
Vendor Revision  
Vendor Serial Number  
Port Statistics  
This screen displays statistics for this port. There are no user settings on this  
screen.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Number of frames sent  
Number of frames received  
Number of words sent  
Number of words received  
Loss Sync Count  
Loss Signal Count  
LIP Count – Loop initialization primitive count  
Initiator IO Count  
Time since last reset  
Number of error frames  
Number of dumped frames  
Invalid Word Sent Count  
Invalid CRC Count  
Link Failure Count  
Primitive Sequence Error Count  
NOS Count – Not operational primitive sequence count  
Fibre Channel Initiators  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Fibre Channel Initiators and press Enter.  
A list of initiators appears.  
To create or delete an initiator, highlight Additional Info and Management and  
press Enter. Then highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
iSCSI Management  
iSCSI Management deals with all iSCSI settings and functions with the exception  
of network connections and settings. This feature appears only with VTrak iSCSI  
models. Network connections and settings are discussed under “Network  
Management” on page 191.  
Node  
These functions affect both VTrak iSCSI ports. There are more iSCSI settings  
under iSNS Ports, SLP Ports and CHAP.  
Note that Header and Data Digest work best with initiators that have a TCP  
Offload Engine (TOE).  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight iSCSI Node and press Enter.  
Node information appears.  
3. Highlight iSCSI Node Settings and press Enter.  
This screen enables you to make iSCSI Node Settings.  
4. Highlight the items you want and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value, then type the new value:  
•
•
Node Name  
Node Alias – Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space  
between words and underscore. An alias is optional.  
•
•
•
•
Outstanding R2T  
Maximum Burst Length  
Default Time to Wait  
Default Time to Retain  
5. Highlight the items you want to set and press the spacebar to toggle  
between Enabled and Disabled:  
•
•
•
•
Header Digest  
Data Digest  
Unidirectional CHAP Authorization  
Bidirectional CHAP Authorization  
6. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Ports  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight iSCSI Ports and press Enter.  
3. Highlight iSCSI Port 1 or Port 2 and press Enter.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Port information appears.  
Port Statistics  
To access port statistics, highlight one of the following and press Enter:  
•
•
•
•
MAC Layer Statistics  
IP Layer Statistics  
TCP Layer Statistics  
iSCSI Layer Statistics  
Sessions  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight iSCSI Sessions and press Enter.  
A list of the current iSCSI sessions appears.  
iSNS  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight iSCSI iSNS Options and press Enter.  
3. Highlight iSNS Port 1 or Port 2 and press Enter.  
iSNS Port information appears.  
4. Highlight iSNS Port Settings and press Enter.  
5. Highlight iSNS and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and  
Disabled.  
When enabled, you must enter the following iSNS IP address and port  
number.  
6. Highlight the items you want and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value, then type the new value:  
•
•
iSNS IP address  
iSNS Port number  
7. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
SLP  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight iSCSI SLP Options and press Enter.  
3. Highlight SLP Port 1 or Port 2 and press Enter.  
SLP Port information appears.  
4. Highlight SLP and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and  
Disabled.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
When enabled, you must indicate whether to use a Directory Agent.  
5. Highlight Use Directory Agent (DA) and press the spacebar to toggle  
between Yes and No.  
6. Highlight Auto DA IP and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and No.  
7. If you specified No, highlight Directory Agent IP and press the backspace  
key to erase the current value, then type the new value.  
8. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
CHAP  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight iSCSI CHAPs and press Enter.  
A list of the current CHAPs appears.  
Add a CHAP  
1. Highlight Create New CHAP Entry and press Enter.  
2. Highlight name and type a name for the CHAP.  
3. Highlight CHAP Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Peer and  
Local.  
Peer is one-way. Local is bi-directional.  
4. Highlight Secret and type a name of 16 or more characters.  
5. Highlight Retype Secret and type the secret again to verify.  
6. Press Ctrl-A to save the CHAP.  
Delete a CHAP  
1. Highlight the CHAP you want to delete and press Enter to mark it.  
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.  
2. Highlight Delete Marked Entries and press Enter.  
3. Press Y to confirm the deletion.  
Ping  
This function enables you to ping other network nodes (PCs, servers, etc.)  
through VTrak’s iSCSI ports.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Ping and press Enter.  
3. Type the IP address you want to ping in the IP Address field.  
4. Highlight Ping Through and press the spacebar to select an iSCSI port.  
5. Highlight Ping and press Enter.  
The results of the ping are displayed on the screen.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
SCSI Management  
SCSI Management deals with all SCSI settings and functions. This feature  
appears only with VTrak SCSI models.  
Channel Information  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight SCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight one of the SCSI ports to select it and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Channel Info and press Enter.  
This screen displays SCSI Channel Information:  
•
•
•
•
•
Maximum Data Transfer Rate  
Maximum LUNs per Target  
Termination Status  
List of currently assigned targets  
Status of currently assigned targets  
There are no user settings on this screen.  
Channel Settings  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight SCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight one of the SCSI ports to select it and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Channel Settings and press Enter.  
This screen displays a list of the 16 Targets and Termination for the selected  
SCSI channel.  
To enable a SCSI target:  
1. Highlight the target you want.  
2. Press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled.  
3. Type Ctrl-A save your settings.  
Note  
You must reboot the VTrak for new settings to become effective.  
To set Termination for the VTrak SCSI controller “Out” connectors:  
1. Highlight Termination Control.  
2. Press the spacebar to toggle through Automatic, On and Off,  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
3. Type Ctrl-A save your settings.  
Cautions  
•
•
Turn off termination only when the VTrak is NOT the last  
device in the SCSI chain.  
Internal termination only works on the “Out” SCSI connectors.  
Target Information  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight SCSI Management and press Enter.  
2. Highlight one of the SCSI ports to select it and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Target Info and press Enter.  
This screen displays a list of the 16 SCSI Targets for the selected SCSI channel.  
To see information and statistics on an enabled SCSI Target, highlight the Target  
you want to see and press Enter.  
Note  
Enable Targets in the SCSI Channel Settings screen.  
Background Activity  
Background activity refers to any of several functions that take place in the  
background while normal operation of the VTrak continues.  
From the Main Menu, highlight Background Activity and press Enter. A count of  
current background activities appears, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rebuild  
PDM  
Synchronization  
Redundancy Check  
Migration  
Transition  
Initialization  
Media Patrol  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Background Activity Settings  
Use this feature to make settings for Background Activities. The Activities  
themselves are started manually or automatically in conjunction with a specific  
disk array or logical drive.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Background Activity and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Background Activity Settings and press Enter.  
3. Highlight following and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and  
Disabled.  
•
•
Media Patrol – Checks the magnetic media on physical drives  
Auto Rebuild – If there is no spare drive of adequate capacity, but this  
function is Enabled, the disk array will begin to rebuild automatically as  
soon as you remove the failed physical drive an install an unconfigured  
physical drive in the same slot.  
4. Highlight following and press the spacebar to toggle through Low, Medium,  
and High rates:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rebuild – Checks the data integrity on disk arrays  
Migration – Change RAID level or add physical dries to disk arrays  
PDM – Looks for bad blocks on the physical drives of disk arrays  
Transition – Returns a revertible spare drive to spare status  
Synchronization – Checks the data integrity on disk arrays  
Initialization – Sets all data bits in the logical drive to zero  
Redundancy Check – Checks, reports and can correct data  
inconsistencies in logical drives  
The rates are defined as follows:  
Low – Fewer resources to activity, more to data read/write.  
Medium – Balance of resources to activity and data read/write.  
High – More resources to activity, fewer to data read/write.  
5. Highlight the following PDM trigger settings and press the backspace key to  
erase the current value:  
•
•
Reassigned Block Threshold – 1 to 512 blocks  
Error Block Threshold – 1 to 1024 blocks  
6. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
Background Activities List  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Background Activity and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Background Activities List and press Enter.  
A list of the current background activities appears.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Event Viewer  
The Event Viewer displays log of events. Events are classified as Runtime and  
NVRAM.  
Runtime Events  
This screen displays a list of and information about the 1023 most recent runtime  
events recorded since the system was started.  
To display Runtime Events:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Event Viewer and press Enter.  
The log of Runtime Events appears. Events are added to the top of the list.  
Each item includes:  
•
•
•
Sequence number – Begins with 0 at system startup.  
Device – Disk Array, Logical Drive, Physical Drive by its ID number.  
Severity – (lowest to highest) Information, Warning, Minor, Major,  
Critical and Fatal  
•
•
Timestamp – Date and time the event happened.  
Description – A description of the event in plain language.  
2. Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log.  
To clear the event log:  
1. Highlight Clear Runtime Event Log and press Enter.  
2. Press Y to confirm.  
NVRAM Events  
This screen displays a list of and information about 63 most recent important  
events. NVRAM events are stored in non-volatile memory.  
To display NVRAM events:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Event Viewer and press Enter.  
2. Highlight NVRAM Events and press Enter.  
The log of NVRAM Events appears. Events are added to the top of the list.  
Each item includes:  
•
•
•
Sequence number – Begins with 0 at system startup.  
Device – Disk Array, Logical Drive, Physical Drive by its ID number.  
Severity – (lowest to highest) Information, Warning, Minor, Major,  
Critical and Fatal  
•
•
Timestamp – Date and time the event happened.  
Description – A description of the event in plain language.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log.  
To clear the NVRAM event log:  
1. Highlight Clear NVRAM Event Log and press Enter.  
2. Press Y to confirm.  
Additional Info and Management  
Additional Info and Management includes these functions: Spare Drive  
Management, LUN Mapping, User Management, Software Management, Flash  
through TFTP, Clear Statistics, Restore Factory Defaults, and Shutdown/Restart.  
Spare Drive Management  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter.  
A list of the current spare drives appears. The following parameters are  
included:  
•
•
•
•
•
ID number  
Operational Status  
Physical Drive ID number  
Configured Capacity  
Revertible – The drive can be returned to spare status after it is used to  
rebuild a disk array  
•
Type – Global (all disk arrays) or Dedicated (to a specific disk array)  
Create New Spare Drive  
Only unconfigured physical drives can be used to make spares. Check your  
available drives under Physical Drive Management.  
1. Highlight Create New Spare Drive and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Physical Drive Number and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value, then type the new value.  
Specify the number of the physical drive you want for your spare. The  
available drive numbers are in parentheses.  
3. Highlight Revertible and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and No.  
A revertible spare drive can be returned to spare drive status after it replaces  
a failed drive in a disk array. See “Transition” on page 258 for more  
information.  
4. Highlight Spare Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Dedicated  
and Global.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Dedicated means this spare drive can only be used with the specified disk  
array(s). Global means this spare drive can be used by any disk array.  
5. If you chose Dedicated, highlight Dedicated to Arrays and press the  
backspace key to erase the current value, then type the new value.  
Specify the number(s) of the disk array(s) you want to assign your spare.  
The current disk arrays are listed in parentheses.  
6. Press Ctrl-A to save the spare drive.  
Spare Drive Settings  
This screen displays information about a spare drive. It enables you to change  
the settings for this spare drive:  
•
Revertible – Yes means the drive automatically returns to its spare drive  
assignment after the failed physical drive is replaced.  
•
Type – Global or Dedicated (to a specific disk array)  
To change these settings:  
1. Highlight the setting you want to change.  
2. Press the spacebar to toggle between the choices.  
3. For dedicated spares, type the array number it is assigned to.  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To run spare check, highlight Start Spare Check and press Enter. The results  
appear next to Spare Check Status.  
Delete Spare Drive  
Caution  
If the spare drive you delete is the only spare, the controller will not  
rebuild a critical array until you provide a new spare drive.  
1. Highlight the spare drive you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark  
it.  
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.  
2. Highlight Delete Marked Spare Drives and press Enter.  
3. Press Y to confirm the deletion.  
LUN Mapping (Fibre Channel and iSCSI)  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter.  
A list of the current iSCSI or Fibre Channel initiators appears.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to recognize the initiator. If LUN  
Mapping is currently disabled, highlight Enable LUN Mapping and press Enter.  
Create New Initiator  
1. Highlight Create New Initiator and press Enter.  
2. Type the name of the initiator.  
Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host system. The  
initiator name must match exactly the initiator’s name setting from the host  
side in order for the connection to work.  
A Fibre Channel initiator name is the World Wide Port Name of the device  
and is composed of a series of eight, two-digit hexadecimal numbers,  
separated by a dash (-).  
An iSCSI initiator name is the iSCSI name of the initiator device and is  
composed of a single text string.  
3. Press Ctrl-A to save the initiator.  
Note  
LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to recognize the  
initiator.  
Delete Initiator  
1. Highlight the initiator you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.  
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.  
2. Highlight Delete Marked Initiators and press Enter.  
3. Press Y to confirm the deletion.  
Map a LUN to an Initiator  
1. Highlight an existing Initiator and press Enter.  
A list of logical drives displays.  
2. In the LUN field, press the backspace key to erase the current value, then  
type the LUN you want to assign to this initiator, from 0 to 255.  
If you make a error, press Ctrl-R to restore the current LUN.  
3. Press Ctrl-A to save the LUN map.  
LUN Mapping (SCSI)  
This function enables you to assign a Target and LUN to each logical drive, so  
the SCSI initiator can recognize it.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter.  
3. Highlight a SCSI Channel and press Enter.  
A list of the current logical drives appears.  
You must enable a Target under SCSI Management before you can assign a LUN  
to it. See “Channel Settings” on page 198.  
To assign a Target and LUN to a logical drive:  
1. Highlight the logical drive you want from the list.  
2. Under Target ID, type the Target number you want to use.  
Target IDs range from 0 to 15.  
3. Press the right arrow key to move to the LUN column.  
4. Under LUN, type the LUN number you want to use.  
LUNs range from 0 to 63. The number of available LUNs may be less,  
depending on the capability of your SCSI HBA card.  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save the LUN Map.  
If the logical drive displays in red, the Target you selected is not enabled.  
If you select an invalid LUN, this message displays: “WARNING: Target X has no  
LUN 0 defined!”  
User Management  
Each user types their user name and password to log into the CLI.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight User Management and press Enter.  
A list of the current users appears.  
Create New User  
1. Highlight Create New User and press Enter.  
2. Highlight each field and type in the appropriate information:  
•
•
User name (no spaces)  
Password (Optional. Maximum 32 characters. Use letters, numbers,  
space between words and underscore)  
•
Display name (Optional)  
3. Highlight Privilege and press the space bar to toggle though the options:  
•
Super – Allows the user full access to all functions including create and  
delete users and changing the settings of other users, and delete disk  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
arrays and logical drives. The default “administrator” account is a Super  
User.  
•
Power – Allows the user to create (but not delete) disk arrays and  
logical drives, change RAID levels, change stripe size; change settings  
of such components as disk arrays, logical drives, physical drives and  
the controller.  
•
•
Maintenance – Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including  
Rebuilding, PDM, Media Patrol and Redundancy Check.  
View – Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make any  
changes.  
4. Highlight Status and press the space bar to toggle between the options:  
•
•
Enabled – Allows the user to log in to the system  
Disabled – Prevents the user from logging in to the system  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save the user.  
Password  
Each user can change their own password. A Super user can change other  
user’s passwords.  
1. Highlight a User in the list and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Change Password... and press Enter.  
3. Highlight New Password and type the password.  
4. Highlight Retype Password and type the password again to verify.  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save the password.  
User Settings: Display Name and Email Address  
Each user can change their display name and email address.  
1. Highlight a User in the list and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Display Name and press Enter.  
3. Highlight the items you want and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value, then type the new value:  
•
•
User name  
Email address  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save the settings.  
User Settings: Privilege and Status  
No user can change their own privilege or status. To change another user’s  
privilege or status, log in as a Super user.  
1. Highlight a User in the list and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Display Name and press Enter.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
3. Highlight Privilege and press the space bar to toggle though the options:  
•
Super – Allows the user full access to all functions including create and  
delete users and changing the settings of other users. The default  
“administrator” account is a Super User  
•
•
•
Power – Allows the user to create and delete disk arrays and logical  
drives, change RAID levels, change stripe size  
Maintenance – Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including  
Rebuilding, PDM, Media Patrol and Redundancy Check  
View – Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make any  
changes  
4. Highlight Status and press the space bar to toggle between the options:  
•
•
Enabled – Allows the user to log in to the system  
Disabled – Prevents the user from logging in to the system  
5. Press Ctrl-A to save the settings.  
Delete User  
1. Highlight the user you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.  
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.  
2. Highlight Delete Marked Users and press Enter.  
3. Press Y to confirm the deletion.  
Note  
You cannot delete a user while you are logged in as that user.  
Software Management  
VTrak’s software services include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Email  
SLP (Service Location Protocol)  
Webserver  
Telnet  
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)  
CIM (Common Information Model [a protocol])  
Netsend  
To start any of these services:  
1. Highlight the service and press Enter.  
2. In the Service Setting screen, highlight Start and press Enter.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
To stop any of these services:  
1. Highlight the service and press Enter.  
2. In the Service Setting screen, highlight Stop and press Enter.  
To restart any of these services:  
1. Highlight the service and press Enter.  
2. In the Service Setting screen, highlight Restart and press Enter.  
Email  
1. Highlight Email and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic  
and Manual.  
3. Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current  
value, then type the new value:  
•
•
Server IP address  
Server Port number  
4. Highlight Authentication and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and  
No.  
If you selected Yes, type in a User name and Password in the fields  
provided.  
5. The following items are optional but recommended. Highlight and press the  
backspace key to erase the current value, then type the new value:  
•
•
Sender’s email address  
Subject Line for the email message  
6. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To start, stop or restart the Email service, highlight Start, Stop or Restart and  
press Enter.  
SLP  
1. Highlight SLP and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic  
and Manual.  
3. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To start, stop or restart the Email service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and  
press Enter.  
Webserver  
1. Highlight Webserver and press Enter.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
2. Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic  
and Manual.  
3. Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current  
value, then type the new value:  
•
•
HTTP Port – 80 is the default  
Session Time Out – 24 minutes is the default. 1440 minutes = 24 hours  
4. Highlight SSL and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and  
Disabled.  
5. Highlight HTTPS Port and press the backspace key to erase the current  
value, then type the new value. 443 is the default.  
6. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To start, stop or restart the Webserver service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart  
and press Enter.  
Telnet  
1. Highlight Telnet and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic  
and Manual.  
3. Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current  
value, then type the new value:  
•
•
•
Port number – 2300 is the default  
Session Time Out – 24 minutes is the default. 1440 minutes = 24 hours  
Maximum number of connections – 4 is the default  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To start, stop or restart the Telnet service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and  
press Enter.  
SNMP  
1. Highlight SNMP and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic  
and Manual.  
3. Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current  
value, then type the new value:  
•
•
•
•
Port Number – 161 is the default  
System Name – (optional) Type a system name in this field  
System Location – Type a country name in this field  
System Contact – Type the email address of your system administrator  
in this field  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
•
Read Community – Type a community name in this field  
Write Community – private (no change possible)  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To start, stop or restart the SNMP service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and  
press Enter.  
SNMP Trap Sinks  
1. Highlight SNMP and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Trap Sinks and press Enter.  
A list of the current trap sinks appears.  
To add a trap sink:  
1. Highlight Create New Trap Sink and press Enter  
2. Highlight Trap Sink IP address and press the backspace key to erase the  
current value, then type the new IP address in this field.  
3. Highlight Trap Filter and press the spacebar to toggle through the severity  
levels.  
The Severity Levels are (lowest to highest) Information, Warning, Minor,  
Major, Critical and Fatal.  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save the Trap Sink.  
To delete a trap sink:  
1. Highlight the trap sink you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.  
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.  
2. Highlight Delete Marked Entries and press Enter.  
CIM  
1. Highlight CIM and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic  
and Manual.  
3. Highlight HTTP and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and  
Disabled.  
4. Highlight HTTP Port, press the backspace key to erase, type new value.  
5988 is the default port number.  
5. Highlight HTTPS and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and  
Disabled.  
6. Highlight HTTPS Port, press the backspace key to erase, type new value.  
5989 is the default port number.  
7. Highlight Authentication and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled  
and Disabled.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Note: The default name is cim. You cannot change the name or add users.  
Note: CIM service must be running to change the password.  
The default password is password.  
8. Highlight Change Password... and press Enter to change the password.  
9. Highlight Old Password and type the current password.  
10. Highlight New Password and type a new password.  
11. Highlight Retype Password and type the new password again.  
12. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To start, stop or restart the CIM service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and  
press Enter.  
Netsend  
1. Highlight Netsend and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic  
and Manual.  
3. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To start, stop or restart the Netsend service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and  
press Enter.  
Netsend Recipients  
Note that the Messenger service must be running on the recipient PC in order to  
receive reports.  
To add a recipient:  
1. Highlight Netsend and press Enter.  
2. Highlight Message Recipient and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Create New Message Recipient and press Enter.  
4. Type the recipient’s IP address into the field provided.  
5. Highlight Message Event Severity Filter and press the spacebar to change  
severity levels.  
The selected level and all higher severity levels of severity will be reported.  
Severity levels (from lowest to highest) are: Info, Warning, Minor, Major,  
Critical, and Fatal.  
6. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To change recipient settings:  
1. Highlight the recipient whose settings you want to change and press Enter.  
2. Type the recipient’s IP address into the field provided.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
3. Highlight Message Event Severity Filter and press the spacebar to change  
severity levels.  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
To delete a recipient:  
1. Highlight the recipient you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.  
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing  
2. Highlight Delete Marked Entries and press Enter.  
Flash through TFTP  
Use this function to flash the VTrak’s firmware. See “Firmware Update – CLU” on  
page 219 for this procedure.  
Clear Statistics  
This function clears the statistical counts for the RAID controller, Fibre Channel  
ports, iSCSI ports, physical drives, and logical drives.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Clear Statistics and press Enter.  
3. Press Y to confirm the deletion.  
Restore Factory Defaults  
This function restores the factory default settings to the firmware and software  
items you select.  
Caution  
Use this function with care. Do not restore to default settings for  
any item unless you are sure this action is needed.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Restore Factory Defaults and press Enter.  
3. Highlight the setting group you want and press the spacebar to toggle  
between Yes and No.  
Yes means this setting will be restored to the default value.  
4. Highlight Restore Factory Defaults and press Enter.  
5. Press Y to confirm the reset.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU  
Shutdown and Restart  
This function enables you to shutdown or restart the VTrak subsystem. You can  
only do part of this procedure in the CLU. Additional action is required, as  
described below. What you see on the screen differs whether you have a Telnet  
or serial connection.  
Shutdown over Telnet  
To shutdown the VTrak subsystem on a Telnet connection:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.  
3. Press the spacebar to display Shutdown then press Enter.  
A warning message appears.  
4. Press Y to continue.  
The screen will go blank.  
5. Wait for no less than two minutes.  
6. Manually turn off the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem.  
Shutdown over Serial  
To shutdown the VTrak subsystem on a serial connection:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.  
3. Press the spacebar to display Shutdown then press Enter.  
A warning message appears.  
4. Press Y to continue”  
5. When this message appears:  
Shutdown complete. It is now safe to power off  
the subsystem.  
turn off the power supply switches.  
Restart over Telnet  
To restart the VTrak subsystem on a Telnet connection:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.  
3. Press the spacebar to display Restart then press Enter.  
A warning message appears.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
4. Press Y to continue.  
The screen will go blank.  
5. Wait for two to three minutes.  
6. Re-establish your Telnet connection to the VTrak CLU.  
If you cannot re-establish a connection, wait 30 seconds, then try again.  
Restart over Serial  
To restart the VTrak subsystem on a serial connection:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter  
3. Press the spacebar to display Restart then press Enter.  
A warning message appears.  
4. Press Y to continue.  
The screen will display shutdown and startup functions.  
5. When the Login:prompt appears, log into the CLU again.  
Buzzer  
This function enables the buzzer on the controller. VTrak’s audible alarm sounds  
a 10-second continuous beep to indicate that one or more logical drives is offline.  
To change buzzer settings:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Buzzer and press Enter.  
A list of Controllers appears with the current buzzer setting and status.  
2. Highlight the Controller whose buzzer you want to set and press Enter.  
3. Highlight Enabled and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and No.  
4. Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Firmware Update – WebPAM PROe (page 217)  
Firmware Update – CLU (page 219)  
Replace Power Supply – All Models (page 220)  
Replace Cooling Unit Fan – M500f/i/p (page 221)  
Replace Cooling Unit Fan – M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p (page 226)  
Replace Cache Battery – M500f/i/p (page 230)  
Replace Cache Battery – M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p (page 233)  
Replace SEP – M500f/i/p (page 235)  
Replace SEP – M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p (page 236)  
Replace RAID Controller – All Models (page 237)  
This Chapter covers the maintenance procedures for VTrak.  
The power supplies, cooling unit fans, and the cache battery are hot-swappable  
field-replaceable components.  
The Storage Enclosure Processor (SEP) and RAID Controller are field-  
replaceable but they require you to power down the VTrak.  
Storage Enclosure  
Processor (SEP)  
RAID Controller  
Controller  
iSCSI  
1
iSCSI  
2
Mgmt  
IOIOI  
Power Supply 1 Cooling Unit 1 Cooling Unit 2 Power Supply 2  
with Battery  
Figure 1. Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) on VTrak M500i (M500f/p are  
similar)  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Cooling Unit with Battery  
Controller  
Mgmt  
FC  
1
FC  
2
IOIOI  
1
2
Storage Enclosure  
Processor (SEP)  
Power Supply 1  
RAID  
Controller  
Power Supply 2  
Figure 2. Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) on VTrak M300f/M200f (M300i/p  
and M200i/p are similar)  
The primary means to identify and diagnose problems on VTrak is to observe and  
interpret LED colors. A discussion of this process is found on the next two pages.  
All hot-swappable components can be fully diagnosed with LEDs, although the  
Command Line Utility (CLU) and WebPAM PROe each offer you additional help  
to make and confirm your diagnosis. See page 261 additional information.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
Firmware Update – WebPAM PROe  
Before you begin, go to the Promise website www.promise.com and download  
the latest firmware update file to your TFTP server or your PC.  
TFTP Server  
To update the firmware from a TFTP server:  
1. Click the Subsystem icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools icon.  
3. Click on the Software Management  
4. Click on the Firmware Update tab.  
5. Do one of the following:  
icon.  
•
Click on the Download from TFTP Server option, then click on the Next  
button.  
•
From the Firmware Update tab dropdown menu, select Download from  
TFTP Server.  
6. Enter the hostname or IP address of your TFTP server in the field provided.  
7. Enter the port number of your TFTP server in the field provided (69 is the  
default).  
8. Enter the filename of the Firmware Update file in the field provided.  
9. Click the Submit button.  
10. When the download is completed, click the Next button.  
A popup message appears warning you not to reboot the VTrak during the  
firmware update procedure.  
11. In the popup message, click the OK button.  
The update progress displays. Then a popup message appears to tell you to  
reboot the VTrak  
12. In the popup message, click the OK button.  
13. Restart the VTrak as described below.  
Your PC  
To update the firmware from your PC:  
1. Click the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
2. Click the Administrative Tools  
icon.  
3. Click on the Software Management  
4. Click on the Firmware Update tab.  
icon.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
5. Do one of the following:  
•
Click on the Download Flash File from Local File through HTTP option,  
then click on the Next button.  
•
From the Firmware Update tab dropdown menu, select Download from  
Local File.  
6. Enter the filename of the Firmware Update file in the field provided.  
Or, click the Browse... button and select the Firmware Update file in the  
Open dialog box.  
7. Click the Submit button.  
8. When the download is completed, click the Next button.  
A popup message appears to warn you not to reboot the VTrak during the  
firmware update procedure.  
9. In the popup message, click the OK button.  
The update progress displays. Then a popup message appears to tell you to  
reboot the VTrak.  
10. In the popup message, click the OK button.  
11. Restart the VTrak as described below.  
Restart VTrak  
To restart the VTrak subsystem:  
1. Click on the Subsystem  
icon in Tree View.  
icon.  
2. Click on the Administrative Tools  
3. Click on the Shutdown link in Management View.  
A Shutdown or Restart tab will appear.  
4. On the Shutdown or Restart tab, select Restart from the dropdown menu.  
5. Click the Submit button.  
6. In the warning box, click the OK button.  
7. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.  
8. Click the OK button.  
When the controller shuts down, your WebPAM PROe connection will be  
lost.  
9. Wait for two to three minutes.  
10. In your browser, log into WebPAM PROe once again.  
If you cannot log in, wait for 30 seconds, and try again. Repeat until login is  
successful.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
Firmware Update – CLU  
Use this function to flash the VTrak’s firmware. Before you begin, go to the  
Promise website www.promise.com and download the latest firmware update  
file to your TFTP server.  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Flash through TFTP and press Enter.  
3. Highlight TFTP Server and type the IP address of your TFTP server in the  
field provided.  
4. Highlight Port Number and press the backspace key to erase the current  
value, then type the new value. 69 is the default.  
A list of the current users appears.  
5. Highlight File Name and type the file name of the firmware image file in the  
field provided.  
6. Highlight Start and press Enter.  
A message appears to tell you to reboot the VTrak.  
7. Restart the VTrak as described below.  
Restart VTrak  
Restart over Telnet  
To restart the VTrak subsystem on a Telnet connection:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.  
3. Press the spacebar to display Restart then press Enter.  
A warning message appears.  
4. Press Y to continue.  
The screen will go blank.  
5. Wait for two to three minutes.  
6. Re-establish your Telnet connection to the VTrak CLU.  
If you cannot re-establish a connection, wait 30 seconds, then try again.  
Restart over Serial  
To restart the VTrak subsystem on a serial connection:  
1. From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press  
Enter.  
2. Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
3. Press the spacebar to display Restart then press Enter.  
A warning message appears.  
4. Press Y to continue.  
The screen will display shutdown and startup functions.  
5. When the Login: prompt appears, log into the CLU again.  
Replace Power Supply – All Models  
Figure 6. The VTrak M500f/i/p power supply shown above.The M300f/i/p  
and M200f/i/p are similar  
The power supply and its fan are replaced as one unit. There are no individually  
serviceable parts. No tools are required for this procedure.  
To remove the power supply, do the following:  
1. Verify that the power supply LED is amber or red.  
2. Switch off the power.  
3. Unplug the power cord.  
4. Press the release button and pull the handle downward as shown (above,  
left).  
5. Pull the power supply out of the VTrak enclosure (above, center).  
To install the power supply, do the following:  
1. Carefully slide the power supply into the enclosure.  
2. Gently press the handle in and upward until it locks (above, right).  
3. Plug in the power cord.  
4. Switch on the power supply.  
5. Verify that the new power supply LED is green.  
This completes the power supply replacement procedure.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
Replace Cooling Unit Fan – M500f/i/p  
The blowers (scroll fans) in the cooling units are replaced as individual parts.  
There are two fans in each cooling unit. No tools are required for this procedure.  
Fan 1 LED Fan 2 LED  
Cautions  
•
•
If the cooling unit you plan to remove contains the cache  
backup battery, your system will be vulnerable to a power  
failure. Temporarily set your cache policy to write-through  
before starting this procedure. See “Logical Drive Settings” on  
page 144 (WebPAM PROe) or “Logical Drive Settings and  
Functions” on page 189. (CLU).  
If power service has failed, do not remove the cooling unit if  
the Controller’s Dirty Cache LED is flashing. See “Unsaved  
Data in the Controller Cache” on page 295.  
To replace a fan, do the following:  
1. Verify that the Fan LED is amber or red and note whether it is Fan 1 or 2  
(above).  
2. Press the release button and pull the handle downward as shown above.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
3. Pull the cooling unit out of the VTrak enclosure. An example of a VTrak  
cooling unit appears below.  
To open the cooling unit, do the following:  
Disconnect  
the battery  
(if present)  
Loosen the  
thumbscrew  
4. If there is a battery on the cooling unit, disconnect the battery connector  
(above).  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
5. Loosen the thumbscrew (above). A retainer keeps the thumbscrew in place.  
6. Grasp the top and bottom sections of the cooling unit with your hands as  
shown above.  
7. Hold the lower section and pull the upper section to the right.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
8. Separate the cooling unit section to access the blowers.  
Fan 2  
Fan 1  
The upper fan is Fan 1, the lower fan is Fan 2. From the LEDs on the cooling unit  
(see the diagram on page 221), you know which fan to replace.  
9. Lift the fan off the mounting pins and detach the electrical connector.  
10. Attach the electrical connector of the new fan and set it in place.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
Be sure you set the fan on the mounting pins, as shown above.  
Be sure the fans point outward, towards the handle (above).  
11. Place the top section of the cooling unit onto the bottom section and slide the  
top lock it in place.  
12. Tighten the thumbscrew.  
13. If there is a battery on the cooling unit, reattach the battery connector.  
14. Carefully slide the cooling unit into the enclosure.  
15. Gently press the handle in and upward until it locks.  
16. Verify that the Fan LEDs are green.  
This completes the fan replacement procedure.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Replace Cooling Unit Fan – M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p  
Cautions  
•
•
The Cooling Unit is NOT a hot-swappable device. Power-  
down the VTrak before removing it.  
If power service has failed, do not remove the cooling unit if  
the Controller’s Dirty Cache LED is flashing. See “Unsaved  
Data in the Controller Cache” on page 295.  
The blowers (scroll fans) in the cooling units are replaced as individual parts.  
There are two fans in each cooling unit. No tools are required for this procedure.  
Fan 1 LED Fan 2 LED  
To replace a fan, do the following:  
1. Verify that the Fan LED is amber or red and note whether it is Fan 1 or 2.  
See the diagram above.  
2. Power down the VTrak.  
3. Grasp the cooling unit handle and pull it toward you, as shown above.  
4. Pull the cooling unit out of the VTrak enclosure.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
An example of a VTrak cooling unit appears above.  
Loosen the  
thumbscrew  
Loosen the  
thumbscrew  
5. Loosen the thumbscrews (above). Retainers keep the thumbscrews in place.  
6. Grasp the top of the cooling unit near the thumbscrews and lift it away from  
the bottom.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
7. Separate the cooling unit sections to access the blowers.  
Fan 2  
Fan 1  
Viewed from the inside (battery) end on the cooling unit, the left blower is  
Fan 1, the right blower is Fan 2. From the LEDs (see the diagram on  
page 221), you know which fan to replace.  
8. Lift the blower off the mounting pins and detach the electrical connector.  
9. Attach the electrical connector of the new blower and set it in place.  
Be sure you set the blower on the mounting pins, as shown above.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
Be sure the blowers point outward, towards the handle, as shown above.  
10. Place the top section of the cooling unit onto the bottom section.  
11. Tighten the thumbscrews.  
12. Carefully slide the cooling unit into the enclosure.  
13. Press on the screen to seat the cooling unit (above). The handle will swing in  
as the cooling unit is properly seated.  
14. Boot the VTrak and verify that the Fan LEDs are green.  
This completes the fan replacement procedure.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Replace Cache Battery – M500f/i/p  
The cache battery is located in the Cooling Unit 1 (the left one). The battery is  
replaced as an individual part. No tools are required for this procedure.  
Cautions  
•
•
•
•
Try reconditioning the battery before you replace it. See  
“Battery” on page 120 for more information.  
Installing an incorrect replacement battery may result in an  
explosion.  
Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions that  
accompany the battery.  
While the battery is removed, your system will be vulnerable  
to a power failure. Temporarily set your cache policy to write-  
through before starting this procedure. See “Logical Drive  
Settings” on page 144 (WebPAM PROe) or “Logical Drive  
Settings and Functions” on page 189. (CLU).  
•
If power service has failed, do not remove the cooling unit if  
the Controller’s Dirty Cache LED is flashing. See “Unsaved  
Data in the Controller Cache” on page 295.  
Note that the Battery LED on Cooling Unit 2 is always dark.  
To replace a cache battery, do the following:.  
Battery LED  
1. Verify that the battery LED is amber or red (above).  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
2. Press the release button and pull the handle downward as shown above.  
3. Pull the cooling unit out of the VTrak enclosure.  
Detach the  
connector  
Lift the battery out  
of the bracket  
4. Detach the connector and lift the battery out of the bracket (above).  
5. Place a new battery into the bracket and attach the connector.  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
6. Carefully slide the cooling unit into the enclosure.  
7. Gently press the handle in and upward until it locks (above).  
8. Verify that the battery LED is green.  
This completes the battery replacement procedure.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
Replace Cache Battery – M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p  
The cache battery is located in the Cooling Unit. The battery is replaced as an  
individual part. No tools are required for this procedure.  
Cautions  
•
•
•
•
•
Try reconditioning the battery before you replace it. See  
“Battery” on page 120 for more information.  
The Cooling Unit is NOT a hot-swappable device. Power-  
down the VTrak before removing it.  
Installing an incorrect replacement battery may result in an  
explosion.  
Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions that  
accompany the battery.  
If power service has failed, do not remove the cooling unit if  
the Controller’s Dirty Cache LED is flashing. See “Unsaved  
Data in the Controller Cache” on page 295.  
To replace a cache battery, do the following:.  
Battery LED  
1. Verify that the battery LED is amber or red (above).  
2. Power down the VTrak.  
3. Grasp the cooling unit handle and pull it toward you, as shown above.  
4. Pull the cooling unit out of the VTrak enclosure.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Disconnect  
the battery  
Pull the battery  
from the clip  
5. Detach the connector and lift the battery out of the bracket (above).  
6. Place a new battery into the bracket and attach the connector.  
7. Carefully slide the cooling unit into the enclosure.  
8. Press on the screen to seat the cooling unit (above). The handle will swing in  
as the cooling unit is properly seated.  
9. Boot the VTrak and verify that the Battery LED is green.  
This completes the battery replacement procedure.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
Replace SEP – M500f/i/p  
The Storage Enclosure Processor (SEP) manages the fans, audible alarm, and  
battery, and monitors system voltages and cooling functions. No tools are  
required for this procedure.  
Caution  
The SEP is NOT a hot-swappable device. Power-down the VTrak  
before removing it.  
Important  
Do not replace the SEP based on LED colors alone. Only replace  
the SEP when directed to do so by Promise Technical Support.  
See page 299.  
To remove and replace the SEP, do the following:  
1. Power down the VTrak.  
2. Grasp the handle and pull it toward you (above, left).  
3. Holding the handle, pull the SEP out of the enclosure (above, center).  
4. Gently slide the new SEP into the enclosure.  
5. Press on the screen to seat the SEP (above, right). The handle will swing in  
as the SEP is properly seated.  
6. Power up the VTrak.  
This completes the Storage Enclosure Processor replacement procedure.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Replace SEP – M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p  
The Storage Enclosure Processor (SEP) manages the fans, audible alarm and  
battery, and monitors system voltages and cooling functions. No tools are  
required for this procedure.  
Caution  
The SEP is NOT a hot-swappable device. Power-down the VTrak  
before removing it.  
Important  
Do not replace the SEP based on LED colors alone. Only replace  
the SEP when directed to do so by Promise Technical Support.  
See page 299.  
Function LEDs  
Release Handle  
To remove and replace the SEP, do the following:  
1. Power down the VTrak.  
2. Grasp the handle and pull it toward you (above).  
3. Holding the handle, pull the SEP out of the enclosure.  
4. Gently slide the new SEP into the enclosure.  
5. Press on the screen to seat the SEP. The handle will swing in as the SEP is  
properly seated.  
6. Power up the VTrak.  
This completes the Storage Enclosure Processor replacement procedure.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6: Maintenance  
Replace RAID Controller – All Models  
The RAID Controller monitors and manages the logical drives. When this  
controller is replaced, all of your logical drive data and configurations remain  
intact because this logical drive information is stored on the disk drives.  
Caution  
The RAID Controller is NOT a hot-swappable device. Power-down  
the VTrak before removing it.  
Important  
Do not replace the RAID Controller based on LED colors alone.  
Only replace the RAID Controller when directed to do so by  
Promise Technical Support. See page 299.  
To remove and replace the RAID Controller, do the following:  
1. Power down the VTrak.  
2. Remove the network, Fibre Channel, iSCSI, or SCSI and null modem  
cables.  
3. Grasp the handle and pull it toward you.  
4. Grasp the Controller and pull it out of the enclosure.  
5. Gently slide the new Controller into the enclosure.  
6. Press on the front to seat the Controller. The handle will swing in as the  
Controller is properly seated.  
7. Attach the network, Fibre Channel, iSCSI, or SCSI and null modem cables.  
8. Power up the VTrak.  
This completes the RAID Controller replacement procedure.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduction to RAID (below)  
Choosing a RAID Level (page 247)  
Stripe Size (page 250)  
Sector Size (page 250)  
Cache Policy (page 251)  
Capacity Coercion (page 252)  
Initialization (page 253)  
Hot Spare Drive(s) (page 253)  
Partition and Format the Logical Drive (page 254)  
RAID Level Migration (page 254)  
Media Patrol (page 257)  
Predictive Data Migration (PDM) (page 257)  
Transition (page 258)  
Introduction to RAID  
RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) allows multiple hard drives to be  
combined together in a disk array. Then all or a portion of the disk array is formed  
into a logical drive. The operating system sees the logical drive as a single  
storage device, and treats it as such. The RAID software and/or controller handle  
all of the individual drives on its own. The benefits of a RAID can include:  
•
•
Higher data transfer rates for increased server performance  
Increased overall storage capacity for a single drive designation (such as, C,  
D, E, etc.)  
•
Data redundancy/fault tolerance for ensuring continuous system operation in  
the event of a hard drive failure  
Different types of disk arrays use different organizational models and have  
varying benefits. Also see Choosing RAID Level on page 247. The following  
outline breaks down the properties for each type of RAID disk array:  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
RAID 0 – Stripe  
When a disk array is striped, the read and write blocks of data are interleaved  
between the sectors of multiple drives. Performance is increased, since the  
workload is balanced between drives or “members” that form the disk array.  
Identical disk drives are recommended for performance as well as data storage  
efficiency. The disk array’s data capacity is equal to the number of disk drive  
members multiplied by the smallest drive's capacity.  
Data  
Stripe  
Disk Drives  
Figure 1. RAID 0 Striping interleaves data across multiple drives  
For example, one 100GB and three 120GB drives will form a 400GB (4 x 100GB)  
disk array instead of 460 GB.  
RAID 0 arrays require one or more physical drives.  
Recommended applications: Image Editing, Pre-Press Applications, other  
applications requiring high bandwidth.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
RAID 1 – Mirror  
When a disk array is mirrored, identical data is written to a pair of drives, while  
reads are performed in parallel. The reads are performed using elevator seek  
and load balancing techniques where the workload is distributed in the most  
efficient manner. Whichever drive is not busy and is positioned closer to the data  
will be accessed first. With RAID 1, if one drive fails or has errors, the other  
mirrored drive continues to function. This is called Fault Tolerance. Moreover, if a  
spare drive is present, the spare drive will be used as the replacement drive and  
data will begin to be mirrored to it from the remaining good drive.  
Data Mirror  
Disk Drives  
Figure 2. RAID 1 Mirrors identical data to two drives  
Due to the data redundancy of mirroring, the drive capacity of the disk array is  
only the size of the smallest drive. For example, two 100GB drives which have a  
combined capacity of 200GB instead would have 100GB of usable storage when  
set up in a mirrored disk array. Similar to RAID 0 striping, if drives of different  
capacities are used, there will also be unused capacity on the larger drive.  
RAID 1 arrays use two physical drives. You can create multiple RAID 1 disk  
arrays on the same Promise product.  
Recommended applications: Accounting, Payroll, Financial, other applications  
requiring very high availability.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
RAID 1E – Enhanced Mirror  
RAID 1E offers the security of mirrored data provided by RAID 1 plus the added  
capacity of more than two disk drives. It also offers overall increased read/write  
performance plus the flexibility of using an odd number of disk drives. With RAID  
1E, each data stripe is mirrored onto two disk drives. If one drive fails or has  
errors, the other drives continue to function, providing fault tolerance.  
Enhanced Data Mirrors  
Disk Drives  
The advantage of RAID 1E is the ability to use an odd number of disk drives,  
unlike RAID 1 and RAID 10. You can also create a RAID 1E Logical Drive with an  
even number of disk drives. However, if you have an even number of disks, you  
will obtain greater security with comparable performance using RAID 10.  
RAID 1E arrays consist of three or more physical drives. You can create an array  
with just two physical drives and specify RAID 1E. But the resulting array will  
actually be a RAID 1.  
Recommended applications: Imaging Applications, Database Servers, General  
Fileservers.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
RAID 5 – Block and Parity Stripe  
RAID 5 organizes block data and parity data across the physical drives.  
Generally, RAID Level 5 tends to exhibit lower random write performance due to  
the heavy workload of parity recalculation for each I/O. RAID 5 is generally  
considered to be the most versatile RAID level  
Distributed Parity  
Data  
Blocks  
Disk Drives  
Figure 3. RAID 5 Stripes all drives with data and parity information  
The capacity of a RAID 5 disk array is the smallest drive size multiplied by the  
number of drives less one. Hence, a RAID 5 disk array with (4) 100 GB hard  
drives will have a capacity of 300GB. A disk array with (8) 120GB hard drives and  
(1) 100GB hard drive will have a capacity of 800GB.  
RAID 5 arrays consist of three or more physical drives.  
Recommended applications: File and Application Servers; WWW, E-mail, News  
servers, Intranet Servers  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
RAID 10 – Mirror + Stripe  
Mirroring/striping combines both of the previous RAID 1 and RAID 0 disk array  
types. RAID 10 is similar though not identical to RAID 0+1. RAID 10 can increase  
performance by reading and writing data in parallel while protecting data with  
duplication. At least four drives are needed for RAID 10 to be installed. With four  
disk drives, the drive pairs are striped together with one pair mirroring the first  
pair. The data capacity is similar to a RAID 1 disk array, with half of the total  
storage capacity used for redundancy. An added plus for using RAID 10 is that, in  
many situations, such a disk array offers double fault tolerance. Double fault  
tolerance may allow your logical drive to continue to operate depending on which  
two disk drives fail.  
Data Stripe  
Data  
Mirror  
Disk Drives  
Figure 4. RAID 10 takes a data mirror on one drive pair and stripes it over  
two drive pairs  
RAID 10 arrays require an even number of physical drives and a minimum of  
four.  
For RAID 10 characteristics with an odd number of disk drives, use RAID 1E.  
Recommended applications: Imaging Applications, Database Servers, General  
Fileservers.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
RAID 50 – Striping of Distributed Parity  
RAID 50 combines both RAID 5 and RAID 0 features. Data is striped across  
disks as in RAID 0, and it uses distributed parity as in RAID 5. RAID 50 provides  
data reliability, good overall performance and supports larger volume sizes.  
Distributed Parity  
Axle 1  
Data  
Stripes  
Axle 2  
Disk Drives  
Figure 5. RAID 50 Striping of Distributed Parity disk arrays  
RAID 50 also provides high reliability because data is still available even if  
multiple disk drives fail (one in each axle). The greater the number of axles, the  
greater the number of disk drives that can fail without the RAID 50 array going  
offline.  
RAID 50 arrays consist of six or more physical drives.  
Recommended applications: File and Application Servers, Transaction  
Processing, Office applications with many users accessing small files.  
RAID 50 Axles  
When you create a RAID 50, you must specify the number of axles. An axle  
refers to a single RAID 5 array that is striped with other RAID 5 arrays to make  
RAID 50. An axle can have from three to eight physical drives, depending on the  
number of physical drives in the array.  
The chart below shows RAID 50 arrays with 6 to 15 disk drives, the available  
number of axles, and the resulting distribution of disk drives on each axle. VTrak  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
attempts to distribute the number of disk drives equally among the axles but in  
some cases, one axle will have more disk drives than another.  
No. of Drives No. of Axles  
No. of Drives  
in RAID 50  
Array  
in RAID 50  
Array  
per Axle  
6
7
8
9
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
3,3  
3,4  
4,4  
4,5  
3,3,3  
5,5  
10  
11  
12  
3,3,4  
5,6  
3,4,4  
6,6  
4,4,4  
3,3,3,3  
6,7  
13  
14  
15  
4,4,5  
3,3,3,4  
7,7  
4,5,5  
3,3,4,4  
7,8  
5,5,5  
3,4,4,4  
3,3,3,3,3  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
Choosing a RAID Level  
There are several issues to consider when choosing the RAID Level for your  
VTrak disk array. The following discussion summarizes some advantages,  
disadvantages, and applications for each choice.  
RAID 0  
Advantages  
Disadvantages  
Implements a striped disk array, the  
data is broken down into blocks and  
each block is written to a separate disk  
drive  
Not a true RAID because it is not fault-  
tolerant  
The failure of just one drive will result in  
all data in an disk array being lost  
I/O performance is greatly improved by  
spreading the I/O load across many  
channels and drives  
Should not be used in mission critical  
environments  
No parity calculation overhead is  
involved  
Recommended Applications for RAID 0  
•
•
•
Image Editing  
Pre-Press Applications  
Any application requiring high bandwidth  
RAID 1  
Advantages  
Disadvantages  
Simplest RAID storage subsystem  
design  
Very high disk overhead - uses only  
50% of total capacity  
Can increase read performance by  
processing data requests in parallel  
since the same data resides on two  
different drives  
Recommended Applications for RAID 1  
•
•
•
•
Accounting  
Payroll  
Financial  
Any application requiring very high availability  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
RAID 1E  
Advantages  
Disadvantages  
Implemented as a mirrored disk array Very high disk overhead - uses only  
whose segments are RAID 0 disk  
arrays  
50% of total capacity  
High I/O rates are achieved thanks to  
multiple stripe segments  
Can use an odd number of disks  
Recommended Applications for RAID 1E  
•
•
•
Imaging applications  
Database servers  
General fileserver  
RAID 5  
Advantages  
Disadvantages  
High Read data transaction rate  
Medium Write data transaction rate  
Good aggregate transfer rate  
Disk failure has a medium impact on  
throughput  
Recommended Applications for RAID 5  
•
•
File and Application servers  
•
•
Intranet servers  
WWW, E-mail, and News servers  
Most versatile RAID level  
RAID 10  
Advantages  
Disadvantages  
Implemented as a mirrored disk array Very high disk overhead - uses only  
whose segments are RAID 0 disk  
arrays  
50% of total capacity  
High I/O rates are achieved thanks to  
multiple stripe segments  
Recommended Applications for RAID 10  
•
•
•
Imaging applications  
Database servers  
General fileserver  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
RAID 50  
Advantages  
Disadvantages  
High Read data transaction rate  
Medium Write data transaction rate  
Good aggregate transfer rate  
High reliability  
Higher disk overhead than RAID 5  
Supports large volume sizes  
Recommended Applications for RAID 50  
•
•
•
File and Application servers  
Transaction processing  
Office application with many users accessing small files  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Stripe Size  
Stripe Size, also called “Stripe Block Size”, refers to the size of the data blocks  
written to, and read from, the physical drives. Stripe Size is specified when you  
create a disk array. In order to change the Stripe Size of an existing disk array,  
you must delete the disk array and create a new one. You can select Stripe Size  
directly when you use the Advanced function to create a disk array. If you use the  
Express function to create a disk array, WebPAM PRO selects the Stripe Size  
when you choose an Application Type.  
The available Stripe Sizes are 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256 KB, and 1 MB. 64 KB is the  
default. There are two issues to consider when selecting the Stripe Size.  
First, you should choose a Stripe Size equal to, or smaller than, the smallest  
cache buffer found on any physical drive in the disk array. Selecting a larger  
value slows read/write performance because physical drives with smaller cache  
buffers need more time for multiple accesses to fill their buffers.  
Second, if your data retrieval consists of fixed data blocks, such as with some  
database or video applications, then you should choose that size as your Stripe  
Size.  
If you do not know the cache buffer or fixed data block sizes, Promise suggests  
you select 64 KB as your Stripe Size. Generally speaking, email, POS, and  
webservers prefer smaller stripe sizes. Video and database applications prefer  
larger stripe sizes.  
Sector Size  
A sector is the smallest addressable area on a physical disk drive. Sector Size  
refers to the size of sector measured by the number of bytes of data it can hold.  
The most common sector size is 512 bytes (512 B). Depending on its capacity,  
there can be up to 4,000,000,000 sectors on a single disk drive. The number of  
sectors is limited by the addressing method of the computer's operating system.  
Sector size is important for two reasons. First, data is written to a disk drive in  
units called blocks. If a data block is smaller than the disk drive's sector size, part  
of the storage space in the sector goes unused. This is why a smaller sector size  
results in a more efficient use of a disk drive’s capacity.  
Second, while a logical drive can be expanded by adding more physical disk  
drives, the number of addresses cannot be increased above 4,000,000,000, as  
noted above. For example, your logical drive has 512 byte sectors, multiplied by  
4 billion addresses. The result is 2,048,000,000,000 bytes or 2 terabytes (TB) of  
data storage capacity. If you simply add more disk drives, your operating system  
will not recognize the additional capacity and you will not be able to use it.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
To make use of logical drives greater than 2TB in size, a larger sector size is  
required. The table below correlates sector size with logical drive capacity.  
Logical Drive Size  
8 to 16 TB  
4 to 8 TB  
Sector Size  
4096 bytes (4 KB)  
2048 bytes (2 KB)  
1024 bytes (1 KB)  
512 bytes (512 B)  
2 to 4 TB  
0 to 2 TB  
When you create a Disk Array using the Express or Advanced methods, and  
when you create a Logical Drive, you can specify sector size of 512 B; 1, 2, or 4  
KB. 512 B is the default.  
In most cases, you should select the smallest sector size that will allow full use of  
the physical disk drives in your disk array.  
Because logical drives can be expanded, you may encounter a situation where  
the usable capacity of your expanded logical drive is reduced by the addressing  
issue described above. There are two alternatives:  
•
•
Limit your logical drive expansion to within the limits described in the chart.  
Back up your data, then delete your existing logical drive and create a new  
one with a larger sector size.  
Cache Policy  
As it is used with VTrak, the term cache refers to any of several kinds of high-  
speed, volatile memory that hold data moving from your computer to the physical  
drives or vice-versa. Cache is important because it can read and write data much  
faster than a physical drive. There are read caches, which hold data as it is read  
from a physical drive; and write caches, which hold data as it is written to a  
physical drive.  
In order to tune the cache for best performance in different applications, user-  
adjustable settings are provided. Cache settings are made in conjunction with  
logical drives:  
•
•
When you create a logical drive. See “Create a Logical Drive” on page 135  
On an existing logical drive. See “Logical Drive Settings” on page 144  
Read Cache Policy  
•
Read Cache – The read cache is enabled.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
Read Ahead – The read cache and the read-ahead feature are enabled.  
Read-ahead anticipates the next read and performs it before the request is  
made. Can increase read performance.  
•
No Cache – The read cache is disabled.  
Write Cache Policy  
•
Write Back – Data is written first to the cache, then to the physical drive.  
Better performance. VTrak has a cache backup battery to protect data in the  
cache from a sudden power failure.  
•
Write Thru – Also “Write Through”. Data is written to the cache and the  
physical drive at the same time. Safer.  
Cache Line Size  
The cache line size refers to the size of data the controller handles internally  
during a data input/output (I/O) operation.  
•
8KB – Increases the number of I/O operations. Use this setting if your I/O  
operations are low-bandwidth (512B to 8KB).  
•
64KB – Decreases the number of I/O operations. Use this setting if your I/O  
operations are high-bandwidth (64KB to 1MB).  
If your I/O operations vary or they fall into the mid-bandwidth range (8KB to  
64KB), use either setting.  
Capacity Coercion  
This feature is designed for fault-tolerant logical drives (RAID 1, 1E, 5, 10, and  
50). It is generally recommended to use physical drives of the same size in your  
disk arrays. When this is not possible, physical drives of different sizes will work  
but the system must adjust for the size differences by reducing or coercing the  
capacity of the larger drives to match the smaller ones. With VTrak, you can  
choose to enable Capacity Coercion and any one of four methods.  
Enable Capacity Coercion and select the Method in the Controller Settings menu.  
The choices are:  
•
•
•
•
GB Truncate – (Default) Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest  
1,000,000,000 byte boundary.  
10GB Truncate – Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest 10,000,000,000  
byte boundary.  
Group Rounding – Uses an algorithm to determine how much to truncate.  
Results in the maximum amount of usable drive capacity.  
Table Rounding – Applies a predefined table to determine how much to  
truncate.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
Capacity Coercion also affects a replacement drive used in a disk array.  
Normally, when an physical drive fails, the replacement drive must be the same  
capacity or larger. However, the Capacity Coercion feature permits the  
installation of a replacement drive that is slightly smaller (within 1 gigabyte) than  
the remaining working drive. For example, the remaining working drives can be  
80.5GB and the replacement drive can be 80.3, since all are rounded down to  
80GB. This permits the smaller drive to be used.  
Without Capacity Coercion, the controller will not permit the use of a replacement  
physical drive that is slightly smaller than the remaining working drive(s).  
Initialization  
Initialization is done to logical drives after they are created from a disk array.  
Initialization sets all data bits in the logical drive to zero. The action is useful  
because there may be residual data on the logical drives left behind from earlier  
configurations. For this reason, Initialization is recommended for all new logical  
drives. See “Logical Drive Initialization” on page 145.  
Caution  
When you initialize a logical drive, all the data on the logical drive  
will be lost. Backup any important data before you initialize a  
logical drive.  
Hot Spare Drive(s)  
A hot spare is a disk drive that is connected to the disk array system but is not  
assigned as a member of the disk array. In the event of the failure of a drive  
within a functioning fault tolerant disk array, the hot spare is activated as a  
member of the disk array to replace a drive that has failed.  
VTrak will replace a failing disk drive in a disk array with an unassigned drive, if  
one is available. The unassigned drive is not part of any disk array. Such a drive  
is called a hot spare drive. There are two types:  
•
•
Global – An unassigned disk drive available to any disk array on the VTrak.  
Dedicated – An unassigned disk drive that can only be used by a specified  
disk array.  
The hot spare policy function lets you select whether a disk array will access any  
unassigned disk drive or a designated drive in the event of disk drive failure. See  
“Spare Drive” on page 153 (WebPAM PROe) or “Spare Drive Management” on  
page 202 (CLU) for information on how to make this setting.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The spare drive effectively takes the place of the failed drive and the RAID  
system immediately begins to rebuild data onto the drive. When the rebuild is  
complete, the disk array is returned to fault tolerant status.  
VTrak includes a function that enables you to return a hot spare drive from a disk  
array back to spare status. When you create the hot spare drive, check the  
Revertible box to enable this feature. See “Transition” on page 258.  
See also “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 286.  
Partition and Format the Logical Drive  
Like any other type of fixed disk media in your system, a RAID logical drive must  
also be partitioned and formatted before use. Use the same method of  
partitioning and formatting on an logical drive as you would any other fixed disk.  
Depending on the operating system you use, there may or may not be various  
capacity limitations applicable for the different types of partitions.  
RAID Level Migration  
To migrate a disk array is to do one or both of the following:  
•
•
Change its RAID level  
Increase the number of disk drives (sometimes called Expansion)  
Migration takes place on an existing Functional disk array without disturbing the  
existing data. While the disk array is migrating, you can access the data as  
before. When migration is complete, your disk array will have a different RAID  
level and/or a larger capacity.  
Different types of disk arrays use different organizational models and have  
varying benefits. The following outline breaks down the properties for each type  
of RAID supported by Promise products.  
Increase  
Redundancy  
Add Lose  
From  
To  
Capacity Performance  
RAID 50  
RAID 10  
RAID 5  
RAID 0  
RAID 50  
RAID 5  
RAID 0  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RAID 10  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
Increase  
Redundancy  
From  
RAID 5  
To  
Capacity Performance  
Add  
Lose  
RAID 50  
RAID 10  
RAID 0  
•*  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RAID 1/1E RAID 50  
RAID 10  
RAID 5  
RAID 0  
•
RAID 0  
RAID 50  
RAID 10  
RAID 5  
•
•
•
•
RAID 1/1E  
* Increases the existing redundancy  
Important  
•
•
The Target disk array may require more disk drives than the  
Source disk array  
If the Target disk array requires an EVEN number of disk  
drives but the Source disk array has an ODD number, ADD a  
disk drive as part of the migration process  
•
•
•
You cannot reduce the number of disk drives in your disk  
array, even if the Target disk array requires fewer disk drives  
than the Source disk array  
RAID 1 (mirroring) works with two drives only. Only a single-  
drive RAID 0 disk array or a single-drive JBOD can migrate to  
RAID 1. Other RAID Levels use too many drives to migrate  
You cannot migrate a disk array when it is Critical or  
performing activities such as Synchronizing, Rebuilding, and  
PDM  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Ranges of Disk Array Expansion  
There are limitations to how large you can expand a disk array, depending on the  
size of your current disk array.  
The current iSCSI, SCSI, and Fibre Channel HBA cards and PC Operating  
Systems support a 10-byte LBA format. This means that a disk array can have up  
to 4 billion address blocks or sectors.  
Multiply the number of blocks by the sector size to find the capacity of a disk  
array:  
4,000,000,000 blocks x 512 bytes per sector = 2,048,000,000,000 bytes  
of data for a 2TB drive.  
Note that you cannot change the size of the sectors nor can you increase the  
number of address blocks above 4 billion.  
As a result, there are range limits imposed upon disk array expansion as shown  
in the table above. For example:  
•
•
You can expand a 2.5 TB disk array up to 4 TB  
You can only expand a 1.9 TB disk array up to 2 TB  
See the chart below.  
Maximum LD  
Expansion Size  
Current LD Size  
Sector Size  
8 to 16 TB  
4 to 8 TB  
2 to 4 TB  
0 to 2 TB  
16 TB  
8 TB  
4 TB  
2 TB  
4096 bytes  
2048 bytes  
1024 bytes  
512 bytes  
You can direct WebPAM to expand a logical drive beyond the maximum  
expansion size. When the expansion is finished, WebPAM will show the logical  
drive in the desired size. However, your operating system might show the logical  
drive at the maximum expansion size (listed in the table above) and the rest of  
the capacity as unformatted disk space.  
At this point, you can:  
•
•
Format the disk space, which results in a second logical drive  
Create a new logical drive. See below  
Create a New Logical Drive  
To create a new logical drive:  
1. Backup the data from the current logical drive.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
2. Delete the current logical drive.  
See page 137 (WebPAM PROe) or page 188 (CLU).  
3. Create a new logical drive with the desired capacity.  
See page 135 (WebPAM PROe) or page 187 (CLU).  
4. Restore the data to the new logical drive.  
Media Patrol  
Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media  
on each disk drive. Media Patrol checks all physical drives assigned to disk  
arrays. Media Patrol does not check unconfigured drives.  
Media Patrol will also check spare drives, if those drives have Media Patrol  
enabled. Media Patrol for spare drives is enabled by default. You can disable it in  
VTrak’s Command Line Interface (CLI).  
Unlike Synchronization and Redundancy Check, Media Patrol is concerned with  
the condition of the media itself, not the data recorded on the media. If Media  
Patrol encounters a critical error, it triggers PDM if PDM is enabled.  
See “Physical Drive Media Patrol” on page 128.  
Predictive Data Migration (PDM)  
Predictive Data Migration (PDM) is the migration of data from the suspect disk  
drive to a spare disk drive, similar to Rebuilding a Logical Drive. But unlike  
Rebuilding, PDM constantly monitors your disk drives and automatically copies  
your data to a spare disk drive before the disk drive fails and your Logical Drive  
goes Critical.  
After the data is copied from the suspect disk drive, the controller marks it with a  
Stale configuration and a PFA error.  
You can clear the Stale configuration and PFA error and put the disk drive back  
into service. See “Clear Physical Drive Conditions” on page 126 for WebPAM  
PROe or see “Clear Stale and PFA Conditions” on page 180 for the CLU. In most  
cases, however, you will remove the disk drive for repair or replacement.  
PDM Triggers  
The following actions trigger PDM:  
•
•
•
A disk drive with unhealthy status (see below)  
Media Patrol finds a disk critical error*  
You initiate PDM manually  
*PDM also counts the number of media errors reported by Media Patrol.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
A disk drive becomes unhealthy when:  
•
•
A SMART error is reported  
The bad sector remapping table fills to the specified level  
Because data would be lost if written to a bad sector, when a bad sector is  
detected, the disk drive creates a map around it. These maps are saved in the  
bad sector remapping table, which has a capacity of 512 reassigned blocks and  
1024 error blocks.  
When the table fills to a specified percentage of its capacity, PDM triggers a  
migration of data from the suspect drive (the disk drive with the bad sectors) to a  
spare disk drive.  
During data migration, you will have access to the Logical Drive but it will respond  
more slowly to read/write tasks because of the additional operation. The time  
required for data migration depends on the size of the disk drive.  
See “Logical Drive PDM” on page 147.  
Transition  
The Transition feature enables you to specify “permanent” spare drives for your  
VTrak subsystem. Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive  
that is currently part of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non-  
revertible spare. The revertible spare drive returns to its original status.  
Transition happens automatically when the following sequence of events takes  
place:  
•
You create a revertible spare drive.  
See page 151 (WebPAM PROe) or page 202 (CLU).  
•
•
•
•
•
A physical drive assigned to your disk array fails and the array goes critical  
or degraded.  
VTrak automatically rebuilds your array to the revertible spare drive and the  
array becomes functional again.  
You replace the failed physical drive with a new physical drive of equal or  
greater capacity.  
VTrak automatically transitions (moves) the data from the revertible spare to  
the new physical drive.  
The new physical drive becomes part of the array and the revertible spare  
drive returns to its original spare status.  
Transition happens manually when you specify a different unconfigured physical  
drive to transition (move) the data from the revertible spare drive.  
See the example below.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 7: Technology Background  
Example  
Following is an example to explain the Transition function.  
In the example above, there is a four-drive RAID 5 disk array and a global spare  
drive. Physical drives 1, 2, 3, and 4 belong to the disk array. Physical drive 5  
remains unconfigured. Physical drive 6 is a revertible spare drive.  
If a physical drive fails in a disk array and there is a spare drive of adequate  
capacity available, the controller automatically rebuilds the array using the spare  
drive. In this example, physical drive 3 failed and the array is rebuilt using  
physical drive 6, the revertible spare drive.  
When the rebuild is complete, the spare drive has replaced the failed drive. In this  
example, failed drive 3 was replaced by spare drive 6. The disk array now  
consists of physical drives 1, 2, 4, and 6.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
There is no spare drive at this moment. Even if physical drive 5 is of adequate  
capacity, it has not been designated as a spare, therefore the controller cannot  
use it as a spare.  
Automatic Transition  
At this juncture, you would replace the failed drive in slot 3 with a new one of the  
same or greater capacity.  
When the VTrak controller detects the new drive in slot 3, it will:  
•
•
Automatically transition the data on drive 6 to drive 3  
Return drive 6 to spare status  
When the Automatic Transition is finished, physical drives 1, 2, 3, and 4 belong to  
the disk array and physical drive 6 is a revertible spare drive. The original  
configuration is restored.  
Manual Transition  
If you wanted to use the drive in slot 5 as a member of the disk array, rather than  
the drive in slot 3, you would run the Transition function manually. See page 140  
(WebPAM PROe) or page 187 (CLU).  
When the Manual Transition is finished, physical drives 1, 2, 4, and 5 belong to  
the disk array and physical drive 6 is a revertible spare drive.  
At this point, you would replace the drive in slot 3. The new drive in slot 3 will be  
unconfigured until you assign it to a disk array or as a spare.  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VTrak is Beeping (below)  
LEDs Display Amber or Red (page 262)  
CLU Reports a Problem (page 268)  
WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem (page 269)  
LEDs Display Amber or Red (page 262)  
Event Notification Response (page 271)  
Critical & Offline Disk Arrays (page 286)  
Enclosure Problems (page 289)  
Connection Problems (page 292)  
Unsaved Data in the Controller Cache (page 295)  
This Chapter covers troubleshooting procedures for VTrak.  
VTrak is Beeping  
VTrak’s alarm has five different patterns, as shown below.  
1x  
1
2
3
4
5
.25s .25s .25s  
.25s  
.75s  
.25s  
.75s  
.25s  
2.5s  
.25s .5s .25s  
6s  
2x  
.25s .25s .25s .5s .25s  
.75s  
.25s  
1s  
.25s  
1.25s  
s
.25s  
3s  
When you first power-up the VTrak, it beeps twice to show normal operation.  
The audible alarm sounds at other times to inform you that the VTrak needs  
attention. But the alarm does not specify the condition. When the alarm sounds,  
do the following:  
•
Check the front and back of VTrak for red or amber LEDs, as described  
above.  
•
•
If email notification is enabled, check for new messages.  
Check for yellow !s red Xs  
in Tree View (see page 269).  
When a continuous tone sounds, there are multiple alarm patterns sounding at  
the same time.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
To make alarm settings or cancel an alarm, see page 121 (WebPAM PROe) or  
page 214 (CLU).  
LEDs Display Amber or Red  
Front Panel  
When the power is switched on, the LEDs on the front of the VTrak will light up.  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI-2  
Activity  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI-1  
Activity  
Logical Drive  
Status  
FRU  
Status  
Controller  
Heartbeat  
Power  
Figure 1. VTrak M500f/i/p Front Panel LEDs  
Power  
FRU Status  
Logical Drive Status  
FC/iSCSI/SCSI-1 Activity  
FC/iSCSI/SCSI-2 Activity  
Controller Heartbeat  
Figure 2. VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p front panel LEDs  
When boot-up is finished and the VTrak is functioning normally:  
•
Controller LED blinks green once per second for five seconds, goes dark for  
ten seconds, then blinks green once per second for five seconds again.  
•
Power, FRU, and Logical Drive LEDs display green continuously.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
•
Fibre Channel/iSCSI/SCSI LEDs flash green if there is activity on that  
channel.  
See the table below.  
State  
LEDs  
Steady  
Green  
Flashing  
Green  
Dark  
Amber  
Red  
Power  
FRU*  
System Off  
System Off  
Normal  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Fan or  
Battery  
Problem  
Fan or  
Battery  
Failed  
Normal  
n/a  
Logical  
Drive  
Logical  
Drive Critical DriveOffline  
Logical  
System Off  
No  
Normal  
n/a  
FC/iSCSI/  
SCSI 1 or 2 Connection  
n/a  
n/a  
Activity  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Controller System Off  
Normal**  
“n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
* Field Replacement Unit. “n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
** Blinks five times in five seconds, five seconds dark, blinks five times again.  
See page 215 for more information about field-replaceable components.  
See page 286 for a discussion of critical and offline logical drives.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Drive Status Indicators  
There are two LEDs on each Drive Carrier. They report the presence of power  
and a disk drive, and the current condition of the drive.  
Power/  
Disk Status  
Activity  
Figure 3. VTrak M500f/i/p Drive Carrier LEDs.  
Disk Status  
Power/Activity  
Figure 4. VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
The VTrak spins up the disk drives sequentially in order to equalize power draw  
during start-up. After a few moments the Power/Activity and Disk Status LEDs  
should display green.  
State  
LEDs  
Steady  
Green  
Flashing  
Green  
Dark  
Amber  
Red  
Power/  
Activity  
Drive  
Present  
No Drive  
Activity  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
No Power/  
No Drive  
Drive  
Rebuilding  
Drive  
Error  
Status  
Drive OK  
“n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
See “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 286 for a discussion of rebuilding and  
failed disk drives.  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Back of Enclosure  
When the FRU Status LED on VTrak’s front panel shows Amber or Red, check  
the LEDs on the back of VTrak. These LEDs give the status of the field  
replaceable units.  
Storage Enclosure  
Processor (SEP)  
RAID Controller  
Controller  
iSCSI  
1
iSCSI  
2
Mgmt  
IOIOI  
Power Supply 1 Cooling Unit 1 Cooling Unit 2 Power Supply 2  
with Battery  
Figure 5. Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) on VTrak M500i (M500f/p are  
similar)  
Battery LED Fan 1 LED Fan 2 LED  
Figure 6. Battery and fan LEDs VTrak M500f/i/p  
Cooling Unit with Battery  
Controller  
Mgmt  
FC  
1
FC  
2
IOIOI  
1
2
Storage Enclosure  
Processor (SEP)  
Power Supply 1  
RAID  
Controller  
Power Supply 2  
Figure 7. Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) on VTrak M300f/M200f (M300i/p  
and M200i/p are similar)  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Fan 2 LED  
Battery LED Fan 1 LED  
Figure 8. Battery and fan LEDs VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p  
Under normal conditions, the power supply, battery, and fan LEDs should display  
green. Note that on the VTrak M-Class, the left cooling unit houses a cache-  
backup battery but the right unit does not.  
State  
LEDs  
Dark  
Green  
OK  
Amber  
Red  
Power supply  
Battery  
Not detected  
Not detected  
Fan failed  
Failed  
Failed  
OK  
Too hot or  
Low capacity  
Fan 1 or 2  
Not detected  
OK  
Wrong speed  
Failed  
To check a component’s installation, follow the same procedure as replacing the  
component, except that you reinstall the original component rather than a new  
one. In most cases, this action fixes a bad connection and allows VTrak to detect  
the component. If this action does not correct the problem, replace the unit. See  
page 215 for instructions.  
The Controller Location LEDs, on the back of the VTrak subsystem, will flash for  
one minute.  
Status LED  
Dirty Cache LED  
Figure 9. A VTrak Fibre Channel controller  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Status LED  
Dirty Cache LED  
Figure 10.A VTrak iSCSI controller  
Status LED  
Dirty Cache LED  
Figure 11. A VTrak SCSI controller  
Under normal conditions, the Controller Status LED (marked with  
icon) is  
green and the Dirty Cache LED (marked with  
) icon is dark.  
State  
LEDs  
Flashing  
Amber  
Dark  
no power  
OK  
Green  
OK  
Amber  
Status  
Error  
n/a  
Unsaved data  
in cache  
Dirty Cache  
n/a  
OK  
“n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
If the Controller Status LED is amber, restart the VTrak. See “Restart the  
Subsystem” on page 112 or “Shutdown and Restart” on page 213.  
If the Controller Status LED continues to display amber after startup, contact  
Promise Technical Support. See “Contact Technical Support” on page 299.  
The Dirty Cache LED flashes during input/output operation. If the LED shines  
amber and the power is off, there is unsaved data in the cache. Do NOT remove  
the cooling unit (M300f/i/p, M200f/i/p) or the cooling unit with the battery  
(M500f/i/p) while this LED is on. See “Unsaved Data in the Controller Cache” on  
page 295 for more information.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
CLU Reports a Problem  
The CLU reports information passively—you must determine which functions to  
check based on the sound of the VTrak’s audible alarm (see page 261) and any  
amber or red LEDs (see page 262).  
In this example, let us check disk array status.  
1. Open the CLU.  
2. Highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.  
3. Observe the status of your disk arrays.  
DaId Alias OpStatus CfgCapacity FreeCapacity MaxContiguousCap  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
0
1
2
DA0 OK  
DA1 Degraded 189.06GB  
DA2 OK 73.57GB  
75.44GB  
66.06GB  
179.68GB  
64.20GB  
66.06GB  
179.68GB  
64.20GB  
At this point, you can highlight the Degraded array and press Enter to see more  
information. See below.  
Disk Array ID  
OperationalStatus  
FreeCapacity  
: 1  
: Degraded  
: 179.68 GB ConfigurableCapacity  
Physical Capacity  
MaxContiguousCapacity : 11.18GB  
: 179.68GB  
: 189.06GB  
SupportedRAIDLevels: 0 5 10 1E  
Disk Array Alias  
MediaPatrol  
PDM  
: DA1  
: Enabled  
: Enabled  
Transport  
Rebuild  
Predictive Data Migration  
Transition  
Dedicated Spare Drives in the Array  
Physical Drives in the Array  
Logical Drives in the Array  
[Locate Disk Array]  
Save Settings  
Restore Settings  
[CTRL-A]  
[CTRL-R]  
Return to Previous Menu  
From this screen:  
•
Highlight Physical Drives in the Array and press Enter to identify the failed  
disk drive  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
•
Highlight Rebuild and press Enter to rebuild the array after you replace the  
failed disk drive  
For more information, see “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 286.  
WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem  
WebPAM PROe aids in troubleshooting your logical drives and enclosure by  
continuous monitoring and reporting to the User in the following ways:  
•
•
Displays yellow !s red Xs  
in Tree View (above)  
Sends email messages, per your configuration  
•
Displays popup messages, per your configuration (above)  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
•
Keeps a record in the Event Log (above)  
Auto Rebuild  
Replacement Drive  
Failed Disk Drive  
Critical / Rebuilding Status  
•
Displays full information on the selected component in the Management  
Window (above)  
Also see these troubleshooting topics:  
•
•
•
“Event Notification Response” on page 271  
“Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 286  
“Frequently Asked Questions” on page 297  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Event Notification Response  
When you select Event Notification, WebPAM PROe sends popup and/or email  
messages regarding its status. The messages you see depend on your  
notification selection (see page 77) and what is currently happening in the VTrak.  
The chart below gives the suggested action when the corresponding message is  
displayed. A list of major categories is shown below.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Battery (page 271)  
Blowers (page 272)  
Cache (page 273)  
•
•
•
PDM (page 278)  
Physical Disk (page 278)  
PSU (Power Supply Units)  
(page 280)  
Controller (page 273)  
Disk Array (page 273)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PSU Fans (page 280)  
RAID Level Migration (page 281)  
Rebuild (page 282)  
Drive Interface Controller  
(page 273)  
•
•
•
Enclosure (page 274)  
Event Log (page 274)  
Redundancy Check (page 282)  
Resource (page 283)  
Host Interface Controller  
(page 274)  
Spare Check (page 283)  
Spare Drives (page 283)  
SMART (page 283)  
•
•
•
•
•
Fibre Channel (page 276)  
iSCSI (page 276)  
Stripe Level Migration (page 284)  
Synchronization (page 284)  
System (VTrak) (page 285)  
Transition (page 285)  
Logical Drive (page 276)  
Media Patrol (page 277)  
Online Capacity Expansion  
(page 277)  
Watermark (page 285)  
Event  
Action  
Battery  
Battery temperature is  
above the threshold  
The battery is too hot. Verify proper airflow around  
the through the VTrak. If airflow is OK, replace the  
battery. See page 230 or page 233.  
Battery temperature is  
normal  
Normal.  
Battery capacity is below Battery is drained. Run battery reconditioning. See  
the threshold page 121.  
Battery capacity is normal Normal.  
Battery is discharging Battery is undergoing reconditioning.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Event  
Action  
Battery is being recharged.  
Battery is charging  
Battery reconditioning is Battery reconditioning is finished.  
complete  
Battery is malfunctioning Run battery reconditioning. See page 121. If this  
message reappears, replace the battery.  
Battery reconditioned  
successfully  
Battery reconditioning is finished.  
Battery reconditioning has Replace the battery. See page 230or page 233.  
failed  
Battery is reaching end of Replace the battery. See page 230or page 233.  
life  
Battery is removed  
The battery was disconnected or removed. Reinstall  
the battery. See page 230or page 233.  
Battery charging failed  
Replace the battery. See page 230or page 233.  
Battery reconditioning has begun.  
Battery reconditioning  
started  
Battery recondition  
terminated  
The battery was disconnected or removed during  
reconditioning. Reinstall the battery. See page 230or  
page 233.  
Blowers  
Blowers have started  
Blowers have stopped  
Normal.  
Verify that the cooling unit is properly installed. If the  
blower still does not turn, replace the blowers. See  
page 221 or page 226.  
Blower speed is  
increased  
Check the VTrak for overheating. See page 289.  
Temporary overheat condition was corrected.  
Replace the blowers. See page 221 or page 226.  
Normal.  
Blower speed is  
decreased  
Blowers are NOT  
functioning  
Blowers have been  
inserted  
Blowers have been  
removed  
Reinstall the cooling unit(s). If the blowers does not  
turn, replace the blowers. See page 221 or page 226.  
Blowers are functioning  
normally  
Normal.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Event  
Action  
Blowers are NOT installed Reinstall the cooling unit(s). If the blowers does not  
turn, replace the blowers. See page 221 or page 226.  
Blower status is unknown Check for airflow out of the cooling unit. If there is  
none, check for proper installation.  
Cache  
BBU flushing has started VTrak’s cache is being flushed.  
BBU flushing has ended VTrak’s cache has been flushed.  
BBU flushing has failed  
VTrak’s cache could not be flush. Check your cache  
flush interval setting. See page 116.  
Controller  
The controller  
The user successfully change controller settings. See  
parameter(s) changed by page 116.  
user  
The controller has new  
crash information  
Check the event logs. See page 70.  
Controller temperature is The VTrak controller is overheating. Check for airflow  
above the threshold/  
warning threshold  
around and through the controller, and verify that all  
fans are working. Replace fans as needed.  
Controller temperature is The VTrak controller is seriously overheating. Check  
above the critical  
threshold  
for airflow around and through the controller, and  
verify that all fans are working. Replace fans as  
needed.  
Disk Array  
New disk array has been Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
created  
Disk array has been  
deleted  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Disk array has been  
added  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Disk array has been  
removed  
The physical drives of the disk array were removed  
from the enclosure.  
Disk array settings have The user successfully logical drive settings. See  
been changed  
page 135.  
Drive Interface Controller  
Drive-interface controller Normal.  
found  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Event  
Action  
Drive-interface controller Restart the VTrak. See page 218. If this message  
is NOT found  
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
Drive-interface  
Normal.  
diagnostics has passed  
Drive-interface  
diagnostics has failed  
Restart the VTrak. See page 218. If this message  
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
Drive-interface controller Drive-to-controller parity error. If this message  
has generated a general/ appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
data parity error.  
page 299.  
Enclosure  
Enclosure temperature is The VTrak is overheating. Check for airflow around  
above the threshold/  
warning threshold  
and through the VTrak, and verify that all fans are  
working. Replace fans as needed.  
Enclosure temperature is The VTrak is seriously overheating. Check for airflow  
above the critical  
threshold  
around and through the VTrak, and verify that all fans  
are working. Replace fans as needed.  
Enclosure temperature is Normal.  
within the normal range  
Event Log  
Event logging is enabled Event logging has been successfully enabled.  
Event logging is disabled Event logging has been disabled.  
Event log buffer is cleared The event log was cleared.  
in RAM  
Event log buffer is cleared The non-volatile RAM event log was cleared.  
in NVRAM  
Event log buffer is cleared The MDD (disk drive) event log was cleared.  
in MDD  
Host Interface Controller  
Host-interface controller A FC/iSCSI error occurred. If this message appears  
has detected parity/data repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
parity/command parity  
error  
page 299.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Event  
Action  
Host-interface controller The initiator sent a reset command. If this message  
has detected bus reset  
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
Host-interface controller Restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
has encountered an  
unrecoverable error  
Host-interface controller Result of user action. Normal.  
has received an abort-  
task/ abort task set/clear  
task set command.  
Host-interface controller Result of clearing an auto contingent alliance  
has received an clear  
ACA command.  
condition. If this message appears repeatedly,  
contact Technical Support. See page 299.  
Host-interface controller Result of user action. Normal.  
has received a LUN reset  
command.  
Host-interfacecontroller is A FC/iSCSI error occurred. If this message appears  
informed that the initiator repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
detected an error.  
page 299.  
Host-interface controller A FC/iSCSI target received a second identify  
has received illegal  
secondary identification  
message with a different LUN. If this message  
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
Host-interface controller A FC/iSCSI message parity error. If this message  
has received a message appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
parity error  
page 299.  
Host-interface controller The VTrak rebooted itself. If this message appears  
has received a bus reboot repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
Host-interface controller An unidentified error occurred. If this message  
has encountered an  
unknown error  
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
Host-interface controller A VTrak system error occurred. If this message  
has encountered a  
system error  
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
Host-interface controller Restart the VTrak. See page 218. If this message  
has encountered a fatal  
error  
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Event  
Action  
Host-interface controller Result of user action. Normal.  
settings have changed  
Fibre Channel  
Fibre Channel controller The initiator sent a reset command. If this message  
has detected bus reset  
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
Fibre Channel controller Result of user action. Normal.  
has received a LUN reset  
command.  
Fibre Channel controller Restart the VTrak. See page 218. If this message  
has encountered a fatal  
error  
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See  
page 299.  
Fibre Channel link is up  
FC link connected and ready. Normal.  
Fibre Channel link is  
down  
FC link disconnected or otherwise not working.  
Fibre Channel controller Result of user action. Normal.  
settings have changed  
iSCSI  
iSCSI link is up  
iSCSI link is down  
Logical Drive  
iSCSI link connected and ready. Normal.  
iSCSI link disconnected or otherwise not working.  
Logical drive initialization Result of user action. Normal.  
has started  
Logical drive initialization Logical drive is ready to use. Normal.  
has completed  
Logical drive initialization Initialization paused because of user intervention,  
has paused  
schedule or a higher priority background activity.  
Logical drive initialization Initialization has resumed again after a pause.  
has resumed  
Logical drive initialization Initialization stopped because of user intervention,  
has stopped  
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went  
critical or offline.  
Logical drive initialization Initialization failure due to a failed disk drive. Replace  
marks the logical drive  
offline  
the disk drive, delete and recreate the logical drive.  
See page 16 and page 135.  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Event  
Action  
Logical drive initialization System resources are low. Reduce system load or  
is aborted due to an  
internal error.  
restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
Logical drive initialization Initialization has been set manually or by schedule.  
is queued  
A new logical drive has  
been created  
Result of user action. Normal.  
Logical drive has been  
deleted  
Result of user action. Normal.  
Logical drive has been  
placed online  
The physical drives of the array are restored to online  
status.  
Logical drive has been  
placed online. Possible  
data loss  
One or more physical drives in the array went offline.  
See page 286.  
Logical drive has been set One or more physical drives in the array went offline.  
to critical.  
See page 286.  
Logical drive axle has  
been placed online  
RAID 50. One of the axles (RAID 5 arrays) returned  
on online status.  
Media Patrol  
Media patrol is started  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Media patrol is completed Normal.  
Media patrol is paused Media patrol paused because of user intervention,  
schedule or a higher priority background activity.  
Media patrol is resumed Media patrol has resumed again after a pause.  
Media patrol is stopped  
Media patrol stopped because of user intervention,  
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went  
critical or offline.  
Media patrol is aborted  
due to an internal error.  
System resources are low. Reduce system load or  
restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
Media patrol is queued  
Media patrol has been set manually or by schedule.  
Media patrol is stopped  
internally  
Media patrol stopped because the disk array was  
deleted or removed.  
Online Capacity Expansion  
Online capacity  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
expansion has started  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Event  
Action  
Online capacity  
Normal.  
expansion has completed  
Online capacity  
expansion has paused  
Expansion paused because of user intervention,  
schedule or higher priority background activity.  
Online capacity  
Expansion has resumed again after a pause or a  
expansion has resumed reboot.  
Online capacity  
Expansion stopped because of user intervention,  
expansion has stopped  
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went  
critical or offline.  
Online capacity  
expansion has  
encountered a physical  
disk error  
Bad block found on a disk drive. Migration will finish.  
Check the disk drive check table after migration and  
replace disk drive as needed. See page 147.  
Online capacity  
System resources are low. Reduce system load or  
expansion is aborted due restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
to an internal error.  
Online capacity  
Synchronization has been set manually or by  
expansion is queued  
schedule.  
PDM  
PDM is started  
PDM is completed  
PDM is paused  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Normal.  
PDM paused because of user intervention, schedule  
or a higher priority background activity.  
PDM is resumed  
PDM is stopped  
PDM has resumed again after a pause.  
PDM stopped because of user intervention, schedule  
or the logical drive was deleted or went critical or  
offline.  
PDM is switched to  
rebuild.  
PDM changed to rebuild because the logical drive  
went critical  
PDM is stopped internally The destination drive was removed or used for a  
rebuild.  
Physical Disk  
Physical disk is marked  
online  
Disk drive restored to normal operation.  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Event  
Action  
Physical disk is marked  
online  
Disk drive removed from service due to errors. If  
necessary, try to force the disk online. See page 127  
or page 181.  
Physical disk is marked  
as dead.  
Disk drive failure. Replace the disk drive. See  
page 16.  
Physical disk has been  
reset  
Disk drive reset after error and should function  
normally.  
Physical disk assigned as Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
global spare  
Physical disk is no longer Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
assigned as global spare  
Physical disk assigned as Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
dedicated spare  
Physical disk is no longer Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
assigned as dedicated  
spare  
Physical disk has been  
inserted  
A disk drive has been inserted into the VTrak  
subsystem.  
Physical disk has been  
removed  
A disk drive has been removed from the VTrak  
subsystem.  
Bad sector is found on  
physical disk  
Disk drive has a bad sector. The drive should remap  
around the bad sector. If this message appears  
repeatedly, replace the disk drive.  
Error is detected in remap Disk drive has a bad remap sectors. If this message  
sectors  
appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.  
Command times out on  
physical drive  
Disk drive not responding to commands. If this  
message appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.  
Physical disk negotiation Disk drive had to reduce its data rate. If this message  
speed is decreased. appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.  
Previously configureddisk Disk drive may have failed or was removed from the  
is no longer found  
enclosure. Replace or reinstall the disk drive as  
needed.  
A physical disk has  
Disk drive experienced an unknown error. If this  
encountered an unknown message appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.  
(non-ECC) media error.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Event  
Action  
A physical disk has  
encountered PFA  
condition  
A potentially faulty address or bad sector was found.  
A configured dead  
physical drive has been  
inserted  
The disk drive inserted into the VTrak was marked as  
dead and will not work on the VTrak. Replace the disk  
drive.  
A physical drive page 0/1 Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
settings have been  
changed  
Physical disk is marked  
as dead due to removal/  
failure of reassign  
Replace the disk drive.  
sectors/PFA condition/  
forced offline state  
PSU (Power Supply Units)  
PSU is not inserted/has  
been removed  
A power supply unit is missing from the VTrak.  
Reinstall the power supply unit.  
PSU is off  
A power supply unit is present but turned off. Turn on  
he power supply.  
PSU is on  
Normal.  
Normal.  
PSU is installed/  
operational and turned on  
PSU is installed/  
A power supply unit is present but turned off. Turn on  
operational and turned off he power supply.  
PSU is malfunctioning  
and turned on/off  
Replace the power supply unit.  
PSU 12V/5V/3.3V power Replace the power supply unit.  
is out of the threshold  
range  
PSU 12V/5V/3.3V power Normal.  
is within the range  
PSU Fans  
PSU fan has turned on.  
PSU fan has turned off.  
Normal.  
Verify that the power supply is turned on. If the fan  
still does not turn, replace the power supply. See  
page 220.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Event  
Action  
PSU fan speed increased. Check the VTrak for overheating. See page 289.  
PSU fan speed  
decreased.  
Temporary overheat condition was corrected.  
PSU fan is malfunctioning Replace the power supply. See page 220.  
PSU fan is functioning  
normally  
Normal.  
PSU fan status is  
unknown.  
Check for airflow out of the power supply. If there is  
none, check for proper installation and turn the power  
supply on.  
RAID Level Migration  
RAID Level migration is  
started  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Normal.  
RAID Level migration is  
completed  
RAID Level migration is  
paused  
Migration paused because of user intervention,  
schedule or a higher priority background activity.  
RAID Level migration is  
resumed  
Migration has resumed again after a pause.  
RAID Level migration is  
stopped  
Migration stopped because of user intervention,  
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went  
critical or offline.  
RAID Level migration has Bad block found on a disk drive. Migration will finish.  
encountered a physical  
disk error  
Check the disk drive check table after migration and  
replace disk drive as needed. See page 147.  
RAID Level migration is  
System resources are low. Reduce system load or  
aborted due to an internal restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
error.  
RAID Level migration is  
queued  
Migration has been set manually or by schedule.  
Migration has detected/  
cleared stale NV  
Watermark  
Watermarks are progress markers left as the result of  
interrupted RAID migrations. If the watermark was  
cleared, migration should finish.  
Array was incomplete due RAID migration was interrupted by a shutdown. If  
to missing NV Watermark array is online, try migration again. See page 137. If  
array is offline, delete and recreate array. See  
page 132 and page 131.  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Event  
Action  
Rebuild  
Rebuild is started  
Rebuild is completed  
Rebuild is paused  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Normal.  
Rebuild paused because of user intervention,  
schedule or a higher priority background activity.  
Rebuild is resumed  
Rebuild is stopped  
Rebuild has resumed again after a pause.  
Rebuild stopped because of user intervention,  
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or the target  
disk drive encountered an error. If rebuild stopped by  
user intervention, restart the rebuild. See page 138.  
Rebuild stopped internally The logical drive is offline. See page 286.  
Rebuild is aborted due to System resources are low. Reduce system load or  
an internal error.  
restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
Rebuild is queued  
Rebuild has been set manually or by schedule.  
Result of successful rebuild. Normal.  
Rebuild marks logical  
drive synchronized upon  
rebuild completion  
Redundancy Check  
Redundancy Check is  
started  
Redundancy Check has started manually or by  
schedule.  
Redundancy Check is  
completed  
Redundancy Check has finished.  
Redundancy Check is  
paused  
Redundancy Check paused because of user  
intervention, schedule or a higher priority background  
activity.  
Redundancy Check is  
resumed  
Redundancy Check has resumed again after a  
pause.  
Redundancy Check is  
stopped  
Redundancy Check stopped because of user  
intervention, schedule or the logical drive was deleted  
or went critical or offline.  
Redundancy Check is  
aborted due to internal  
error  
System resources are low. Reduce system load or  
restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
Redundancy Check  
Check the logical drive’s inconsistent block table. See  
encountered inconsistent page 147. Rebuild the disk array if necessary.  
block(s) page 138.  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Event  
Action  
Redundancy Check task Redundancy Check has been set manually or by  
is queued schedule.  
Redundancy Check task The logical drive is offline. See page 286.  
is stopped internally  
Resource  
Resource is NOT  
available  
System resources are low. Reduce system load or  
restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
SEP (Storage Enclosure Processor)  
SEP is not found  
Verify that the SEP is properly installed. See  
page 235 or page 236.  
SEP is found  
Normal.  
Spare Check  
Spare check started on  
the given spare drive  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Normal.  
Spare check completed  
successfully on the given  
spare drive  
Spare Drives  
Physical disk assigned as Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
global spare  
Physical disk is no longer Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
assigned as global spare  
Global Spare has been  
deleted  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Physical disk assigned as Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
dedicated spare  
Physical disk is no longer Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
assigned as dedicated  
spare  
Dedicated Spare has  
been deleted  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
SMART  
SMART error is received A disk drive reported a SMART error. If this message  
appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Event  
Action  
Stripe Level Migration  
Stripe Level migration is Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
started  
Stripe Level migration is Normal.  
completed  
Stripe Level migration is Migration paused because of user intervention,  
paused  
schedule or a higher priority background activity.  
Stripe Level migration is Migration has resumed again after a pause.  
resumed  
Stripe Level migration is Migration stopped because of user intervention,  
stopped  
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went  
critical or offline.  
Stripe Level migration has Bad block found on a disk drive. Migration will finish.  
encountered a physical  
disk error  
Check the disk drive check table after migration and  
replace disk drive as needed. See page 147.  
Stripe Level migration is System resources are low. Reduce system load or  
aborted due to an internal restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
error.  
Stripe Level migration is Migration has been set manually or by schedule.  
queued  
Synchronization  
Synchronization is started Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Synchronization is  
completed  
Normal.  
Synchronization is  
paused  
Synchronization paused because of user  
intervention, schedule or higher priority background  
activity.  
Synchronization is  
resumed  
Synchronization has resumed again after a pause or  
a reboot.  
Synchronization is  
stopped  
Synchronization stopped because of user  
intervention, schedule or the logical drive was deleted  
or went critical or offline.  
Synchronization is  
System resources are low. Reduce system load or  
aborted due to an internal restart the VTrak. See page 218.  
error.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Event  
Action  
Synchronization is  
queued  
Synchronization is already running on another logical  
drive in the same array.  
Synchronization is  
stopped internally  
Synchronization stopped because the disk array was  
deleted or removed.  
System (VTrak)  
The system is started  
The system is stopped  
Transition  
The VTrak has been started.  
The VTrak was shut down.  
Transition is started  
Transition is completed  
Transition is paused  
Result of settings or user action. Normal.  
Normal.  
Transition paused because of user intervention,  
schedule or a higher priority background activity.  
Transition is resumed  
Transition is stopped  
Transition has resumed again after a pause.  
Transition stopped because of user intervention or  
the logical drive was deleted.  
Transition was switched Transition changed to rebuild because the logical  
to rebuild  
drive went critical.  
Watermark  
Migration has detected/  
cleared stale NV  
Watermark  
Watermarks are progress markers left as the result of  
interrupted RAID migrations. If the watermark was  
cleared, migration should finish.  
Array was incomplete due RAID migration was interrupted by a shutdown. If  
to missing NV Watermark array is online, try migration again. See page 137. If  
array is offline, delete and recreate array. See  
page 132 and page 131.  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Critical & Offline Disk Arrays  
A fault-tolerant disk array—RAID 1, 1E, 5, 10, and 50—goes critical when a disk  
drive is removed or fails. Due to the fault tolerance of the disk array, the data is  
still available and online. However, once the disk array goes critical, the disk  
array has lost its fault tolerance, and performance may be adversely affected.  
If the fault was caused by a failed drive that was removed, the drive must be  
replaced by another drive, either identical or larger, in order for the RAID system  
to rebuild and restore optimal configuration.  
If your fault-tolerant disk array—RAID 1, 1E, 5, 10, and 50— goes offline, contact  
Promise Technical Support. See “Contact Technical Support” on page 299.  
Warning  
Take no further corrective action until you have consulted with  
Promise Technical Support.  
A non-fault tolerant disk array—RAID 0—goes offline when a disk drive is  
removed or fails. Since the disk array is not fault tolerant, the data stored in the  
disk array is no longer accessible.  
If one disk drive fails, all of the data on the disk array is lost. You must replace the  
failed drive. Then, if the disk array had more than one disk drive, delete the disk  
array and re-create it. Restore the data from a backup source.  
When a Disk Drive Fails  
VTrak provides both audible and visual indicators to alert you of a disk drive  
failure. The following will occur when a disk drive fails or goes offline:  
•
•
•
•
The Disk Array LED changes from green to amber. See page 262.  
The Disk Carrier Status LED changes from green to red. See page 264.  
The audible alarm repeatedly sounds two short beeps. See page 261.  
WebPAM PROe reports the condition. See page 269.  
With a Hot Spare Drive  
When a physical drive in a disk array fails and a spare drive of adequate capacity  
is available, the disk array will begin to rebuild automatically using the spare  
drive.  
After the disk array rebuilds itself using the spare drive, you must replace the  
failed drive.  
To set up a spare drive, see “Create Spare Drive” on page 151 (WebPAM PROe)  
or “Create New Spare Drive” on page 202 (CLU).  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Without a Hot Spare Drive  
If there is no hot spare drive of adequate capacity, you must remove the failed  
drive and install an unconfigured replacement drive of the same or greater  
capacity in the same slot as the failed drive. Until you install the replacement  
drive, the logical drive will remain Degraded.  
•
If the Auto Rebuild function is ENABLED, the disk array will begin to rebuild  
automatically as soon as you replace the failed drive.  
•
If the Auto Rebuild function is DISABLED, you must manually rebuild the  
disk array after you replace the failed drive.  
To enable Automatic Rebuild, see page 71 (WebPAM PROe) or page 200 (CLU).  
To set Hot Spare Policy, see page 150 (WebPAM PROe) or page 202 (CLU).  
Important  
If your replacement disk drive was formerly part of a different disk  
array or logical drive, you must clear the configuration data on the  
replacement drive before you use it.  
See “Clear Physical Drive Conditions” on page 126 (WebPAM  
PROe) or “Clear Stale and PFA Conditions” on page 180 (CLU).  
Rebuild Operation  
During rebuild:  
•
•
The alarm sounds a single short beep, repeated  
No warning icon displays over the Disk Array or Logical Drive  
The Management Window reports the Disk Array’s Operational Status as  
OK, Rebuilding.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Activity  
Status  
Figure 4. VTrak M500f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
Status  
Activity  
Figure 5. VTrak M300f/i/p and M200f/i/p disk carrier LEDs  
•
The drive carrier holding the rebuilding physical drive displays a green  
Activity (left) LED while the Status (right) LED flashes green once per  
second.  
During rebuilding, you can still read and write data to the logical drive. However,  
fault tolerance is lost until the Disk Array returns to OK (not-rebuilding) status.  
After a successful rebuild:  
•
•
•
The alarm is silent  
The Disk Array’s Operational Status as OK  
The rebuilt disk drive Status LED displays steady green  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Enclosure Problems  
WebPAM PROe displays yellow !s red Xs  
components that need attention.  
in Tree View to identify  
When a yellow ! appears over a Subsystem  
in Tree View, click on the  
Enclosure  
icon. The Enclosure screen will display (below).  
In this example, a power supply fan has stopped turning, indicating a failure. The  
Enclosure Diagram displays color and motion changes to identify a failed fan. In  
this case, you must replace the power supply.  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Overheating  
Overheating is a potentially serious condition because the  
excessively high temperatures can lead to disk drive failure and  
controller malfunction.  
Overheating usually results from:  
•
•
Fan failure  
Poor air circulation around the enclosure  
WebPAM PROe reports failed fans along with elevated  
temperature. On VTrak, there are two kinds of fans:  
•
•
Power supply, 1 fan each, 2 fans total  
Cooling units, 2 fans each  
If a power supply fan fails, you must replace the power supply. If  
a cooling unit fan fails, you can remove the cooling unit and  
replace only the fan itself.  
No tools are required for either procedure. See page 221 for  
instructions on replacing the fans.  
Air circulation around the VTrak enclosure may be a more  
complex problem. Use the thermometer icons to help you locate  
the specific hot spot. Check for these conditions:  
•
•
Accumulated dust or objects blocking the fans  
Less than a minimum of 5 inches (13 cm) space between the  
back of the VTrak and the wall or other object  
•
Ambient temperature above 95°F (35°C) where the VTrak is  
operating  
To cool down a VTrak, do the following:  
•
•
Correct any problems identified above  
Power it down and let it sit for an hour or longer  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Power Supplies  
VTraks are equipped with redundant power supplies. The  
advantage of dual power supplies is that, should one fail, the  
other will continue powering the subsystem until the faulty one  
can be replaced. VTrak is capable of operating on a single power  
supply. As a result, if one power supply fails you must watch the  
front panel LEDs or WebPAM PROe in order to become aware of  
the condition.  
The power supplies are hot-swappable, meaning you can leave  
the VTrak running when you replace the bad one. Be careful,  
however, to remove the faulty power supply and not the good  
one, or VTrak will come to an immediate stop and your data will  
be unavailable until the system is powered and booted again.  
As noted above, if a power supply fan fails, you must replace the  
power supply. Without the fan to cool it, the power supply will  
overheat and eventually fail anyway.  
No tools are required for the procedure. See your page 220 for  
instructions on replacing a power supply.  
Battery  
VTrak uses a battery as backup power for the cache. Should a  
power failure occur, the battery enables the cache to hold data up  
to 72 hours. The battery recharges during normal VTrak  
operation.  
In most cases, installing a replacement battery will correct a  
marginal or failed condition. The battery is located on the left  
cooling unit. Remove the cooling unit for access. The battery is  
hot-swappable.  
No tools are required for the procedure. See page 230 for  
instructions on replacing the battery.  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Connection Problems  
When you install your Promise product following the instructions in the Quick  
Start Guide and this Product Manual, you should have little trouble getting your  
equipment to work the first time. But connection problems can arise that are not  
the User's or Installer's fault. Every conceivable problem cannot be covered in  
the documentation but some guidelines could be helpful.  
Connection problems cause a majority of failures in almost any electrical system.  
While the installation of the cables and components was correct, they don't  
function properly, or at all, because:  
•
•
•
•
A connector is dirty or corroded  
A connector is loose or damaged  
A cable looks OK outside but has an open circuit inside  
The wrong cable was used  
VTraks ship with a full set of new cables, as required for each specific model. Be  
sure to use these components because: 1.) They are the proper ones for your  
RAID subsystem, 2.) They are in brand-new condition, and 3.) You paid for them  
with the purchase of your VTrak.  
SCSI Connections  
VTrak uses a network connection to pass command and management  
information. Data is transmitted via the SCSI bus. Proper termination and SCSI-3  
compliant cables are required for the system to operate correctly.  
SCSI connections are both physical (outside) and electrical (inside). You can see  
a physical connection, you can clean it or try a different cable on it. Electrical  
connections are made by firmware and software.  
VTrak makes use of SCSI Target IDs (TIDs) and Logical Unit Numbers (LUNs) to  
enable multiple VTrak arrays managed by a single Host PC  
SCSI channels are completely intolerant of TID conflicts. If you have a conflict,  
the devices on your SCSI chain will not work correctly until it is resolved.  
The VTrak RAID subsystem is sensitive to the presence of other devices on the  
SCSI chain. Do not connect other devices to the SCSI chain with a VTrak, except  
for an other VTrak.  
Termination  
VTrak has an internal termination feature but it works only on the “Out”  
connector. Internal termination is set to “Automatic” by default. For termination  
settings, see “SCSI Channel Settings” on page 95 or “Channel Settings” on  
page 198.  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
SCSI “Out”  
connectors  
This means you can, for example, connect your Host PC to one of the VTrak’s  
SCSI “In” ports without the need of an external SCSI terminator. You can also  
connect both SCSI connectors in a “daisy-chain” with other VTraks.  
Be sure to enable termination on the last VTrak in the chain. Promise  
recommends that you attach the SCSI cable to the “In” connector and set the  
internal termination to “On” or “Automatic”.  
Or you can attach the SCSI cable to the “Out” connector and install a physical  
terminator (not supplied) onto the “In” connector.  
iSCSI Connections  
A recent variation of the SCSI interface is Internet SCSI (iSCSI), which converts  
SCSI commands to TCP/IP commands for communication over a network. VTrak  
uses two Gigabit Ethernet network connections to move data under the iSCSI  
protocol. The iSCSI ports will accept IP address assignments from a DHCP  
server. Also, you can use WebPAM PRO for the initial setup.  
Serial Connections  
VTrak uses a serial connection for the command line interface (CLI) and the  
command line utility (CLU). After you set the IP address, you can access the CLI  
and CLU through a network connection, also. Normally, users prefer WebPAM  
PROe because of its graphic user interface. But the CLI and CLU can do the  
same jobs. And they will work when your network connection is down.  
For VTrak, you must use the CLI or CLU to set the Management Port IP address  
in order for WebPAM PROe to connect with it. See “VTrak Setup with CLI or  
CLU” on page 29. This issue is discussed further under Network Connections  
(below). See the “Set Up Serial Cable Connections” on page 25 for more  
information on making the connection.  
The CLI and CLU control and manage but they do not move data. They  
communicates through a null-modem cable, supplied with the VTrak. A straight-  
through serial cable will not work for this purpose. You may choose not use the  
CLI or CLU often and want to disconnect and store the cable. Consider leaving it  
connected, to be sure it will be there when you need it.  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Network Connections  
VTrak has an RJ-45 Management Port connector on the back of its cabinet. This  
is a Gigabit Ethernet connector designed to connect to your network. The VTrak  
becomes a node on your network like any other PC, server or other component  
with an IP address.  
VTrak ships from the factory an IP address of 10.0.0.1. You must change this  
address to one that will work with your network. You make the initial IP address  
setting using the CLI or CLU. See “VTrak Setup with CLI or CLU” on page 29.  
Connectivity LED  
Activity LED  
State  
Green  
10BaseT 1000BaseT 100BaseT  
No activity n/a n/a  
LEDs  
Dark  
Amber  
Flashing Green  
n/a  
Connectivity  
Activity  
Activity  
“n/a” means this state does not apply to this LED.  
Note that VTrak Management Port can accept IP address assignments from a  
DHCP server. Use VTrak's Command Line Utility (CLU) to enable this feature. If  
you have not activated DHCP support but there is a DHCP server on your  
network, there is a chance that it will inadvertently assign the VTrak's  
Management Port IP address to another node. You might see a warning to this  
effect on your PC's monitor. If this happens, WebPAM PROe may not be able to  
connect. See your network administrator to work out a suitable arrangement.  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting  
Unsaved Data in the Controller Cache  
The VTrak M-Class controller has a 256 MB data memory cache protected by a  
battery backup. If there is a power failure while unsaved data is in the cache, the  
battery will power the cache and hold the data up to 72 hours.  
Dirty Cache LED (Fibre Channel)  
Dirty Cache LED (iSCSI)  
Dirty Cache LED (SCSI)  
An LED (marked with the  
icon) is provided to inform you that there is data in  
the cache that has not been saved to non-volatile memory. Such data is  
sometimes called “dirty,” not to suggest it is corrupted in some way but because it  
has not been saved to a disk drive.  
If a power failure has occurred and there is unsaved data in the controller’s  
cache, the Dirty Cache LED shines amber. During this time, do NOT remove the  
cooling unit (M300f/i/p or M200f/i/p) or the cooling unit with the battery  
(M500f/i/p). Wait until power service is restored. After the VTrak reboots  
completely, the data will be saved automatically and the LED will go dark.  
If you have turned off the power manually, turn the power on again and allow the  
VTrak to boot itself completely. Then the data will be saved automatically and the  
LED will stop flashing.  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9: Support  
•
•
•
•
Frequently Asked Questions (below)  
Contact Technical Support (page 299)  
Limited Warranty (page 302)  
Returning product for repair (page 303)  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What kind of disk drives can I use with VTrak?  
VTrak supports 1.5 and 3.0 GB/s Serial ATA disk drives.  
Can I take the disk drives from my UltraTrak, put them into the VTrak and  
keep my disk array or logical drive intact?  
Yes. UltraTrak and early VTrak subsystems used a proprietary method of  
disk metadata, stored in the reserve sector of each physical drive. VTrak M-  
Class uses the industry-standard DDF and has a metadata-to-DDF  
conversion feature. To use the conversion feature, you must restart the  
VTrak M-Class after installing disk drives from an older system.  
If you plan to move Parallel ATA (PATA) disk drives to VTrak M-Class,  
contact your Promise distributor to obtain PATA-to-SATA adapters. You must  
install an adapter onto the VTrak’s drive carrier for each PATA disk drive you  
want to connect to VTrak’s SATA disk drive interface.  
Note that if you move the disk drives from the VTrak M-Class to the older  
subsystems, they will not recognize your disk array or logical drive.  
Can I use my existing SCSI card with VTrak M-Class?  
Yes, if your VTrak is a M500p, M300p or M200p model. However, for best  
performance results, use an Ultra320 SCSI card.  
How can I tell when the VTrak has fully booted?  
When the VTrak is fully booted up, the Power and FRU LEDs will light up  
green. If a disk array is present, the Logical Drive LED will light up green  
also. The Controller LED blinks five times, once per second; goes dark for  
ten seconds; then blinks five times again.  
Why does VTrak come with a Command Line Utility?  
First, to assign your VTrak an IP address in order for the WebPAM  
management software to connect to it. Second, in the event of a network  
failure, you can still access the VTrak. Third, some users prefer the  
Command Line Utility.  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
My WebPAM connection was working OK. But later on, it timed out. What  
do I do now?  
The network condition can time-out for several reasons. When an open  
connection has no action for a specific amount of time (the Administrator can  
change it), the connection times-out automatically for security reasons.  
When you attempt to use WebPAM, it returns to the login screen. Enter your  
user name and password and click Login, and WebPAM will establish a new  
connection.  
I can access the VTrak over my company’s intranet. But I can’t access it  
from an outside Internet connection. How do I make the Internet connection  
work?  
This condition is not related to VTrak, but is due to your firewall and network  
connection protocol. Contact your MIS Administrator.  
With other Promise VTraks, I used the Server’s IP address in WebPAM to  
connect with the RAID subsystem. Why is this VTrak M-Class different?  
VTrak M-Class has the server software embedded. With the M-Class, you  
point your browser directly to the VTrak rather than a server. Also, with M-  
Class you do not have to create a subsystem because the subsystem  
already exists.  
Why can a RAID 1 logical drive on VTrak consist of only two disk drives?  
On VTrak, RAID 1 logical drives work in mirrored physical drive pairs. You  
could create up to seven RAID 1 logical drives. Or you can create a single  
RAID 10 logical drive with data mirroring and up to 14 physical drives. If you  
have an odd number of drives but still want data mirroring, use RAID 1E.  
See “Install Disk Drives” on page 16 and “Introduction to RAID” on page 239  
for more information on the number of physical drives you can use for each  
RAID level.  
Are logical drives on VTrak limited to 2.199 terabytes?  
No. But verify that your operating system supports logical drives over 2.199  
TB. Also, for the operating system to recognize the full capacity of logical  
drives over 2.199 TB, you must specify a sector size of 1 KB or larger when  
you create the logical drive. See “Sector Size” on page 250 or more  
information.  
I have two UltraTraks and use WebPAM to monitor them. Can I use my  
existing WebPAM setup to monitor the VTraks also?  
No. Use the WebPAM embedded with the VTrak M-Class.  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 9: Support  
How can I be sure everything is working OK on the VTrak?  
Locally: The VTrak enclosure has LEDs on the front to monitor the status of  
power, field replaceable units (FRUs) and logical drives. When these are  
green, VTrak is functioning normally.  
Remotely: Check the Tree Icons in WebPAM. If there are no yellow or red  
warning icons displayed, VTrak is functioning normally.  
What happens if a logical drive goes critical?  
On the front of VTrak, the logical drive LED turns amber and an audible  
alarm sounds. See “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 286.  
Can VTrak run using just one power supply?  
Yes, it is possible to run VTrak on a single power supply. There are two  
power supplies so that VTrak will continue running if one of the power supply  
fails. But deliberately leaving one power supply off negates this advantage.  
In addition, leaving one power supply off reduces air flow through the VTrak  
enclosure and can contribute to overheating. Always switch on both power  
supplies.  
Contact Technical Support  
Promise Technical Support provides several support options for Promise users to  
access information and updates. We encourage you to use one of our electronic  
services, which provide product information updates for the most efficient service  
and support.  
If you decide to contact us, please have the following information available:  
•
•
•
•
Product model and serial number  
BIOS, firmware, and driver version numbers  
A description of the problem / situation  
System configuration information, including: motherboard and CPU type,  
hard drive model(s), SATA/ATA/ATAPI drives & devices, and other  
controllers.  
Technical Support Services  
Promise Online™ Web Site  
http://www.promise.com/support  
(technical documents, drivers, utilities, etc.)  
https://support.promise.com/support  
(online request form)  
Promise Online™ eSupport  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
United States  
E-mail Support  
Fax Support  
[email protected]  
(408) 228-1097 Attn: Technical Support  
(408) 228-1400 option 4  
Phone Support  
If you wish to write us for  
support:  
Promise Technology, Inc.  
580 Cottonwood Drive  
Milpitas, CA 95035, USA  
Europe, Africa, Middle East  
E-mail Support  
Fax Support  
[email protected]  
+31 (0) 40 256 9463 Attn: Technical Support  
+31 (0) 40 235 2600  
Phone Support  
If you wish to write us for  
support:  
Promise Technology Europe B.V.  
Science Park Eindhoven 5542  
5692 EL Son, The Netherlands  
Germany  
E-mail Support  
[email protected]  
Fax Technical Support  
+49 (0) 2 31 56 76 48 - 29  
Attn: Technical Support  
Phone Technical Support  
+49 (0) 2 31 56 76 48 - 10  
If you wish to write us for  
support:  
Promise Technology Germany  
Europaplatz 9  
44269 Dortmund, Germany  
Italy  
E-mail Support  
Fax Support  
[email protected]  
0039 06 367 12400 Attn: Technical Support  
0039 06 367 12626  
Phone Support  
If you wish to write us for  
support:  
Promise Technology Italy  
Piazza del Popolo 18  
00187 Roma, Italia  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9: Support  
Taiwan  
E-mail Support  
[email protected]  
Fax Support  
+886 3 578 2390 Attn: Technical Support  
+886 3 578 2395 (ext. 8811)  
Phone Support  
If you wish to write us for  
support:  
Promise Technology, Inc.  
2F, No. 30, Industry E. Rd. IX  
Science-based Industrial Park  
Hsinchu, Taiwan, R.O.C.  
China  
E-mail Support  
Fax Support  
[email protected]  
+86-10-8857-8015 Attn: Technical Support  
+86-10-8857-8085/8095  
Phone Support  
If you wish to write us for  
support:  
Promise Technology China  
Room 1205, Tower 3  
Webok Time Center, No.17  
South Zhong Guan Cun Street  
Hai Dian District, Beijing 100081, China  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Limited Warranty  
Promise Technology, Inc. (“Promise”) warrants that for three (3) years from the  
time of the delivery of the product to the original end user:  
a) the product will conform to Promise’s specifications;  
b) the product will be free from defects in material and workmanship under  
normal use and service.  
This warranty:  
a) applies only to products which are new and in cartons on the date of  
purchase;  
b) is not transferable;  
c) is valid only when accompanied by a copy of the original purchase  
invoice.  
d) Is not valid on spare parts, fans, and power supplies  
This warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from:  
a) improper or inadequate maintenance, or unauthorized modification(s),  
performed by the end user;  
b) operation outside the environmental specifications for the product;  
c) accident, misuse, negligence, misapplication, abuse, natural or  
personal disaster, or maintenance by anyone other than a Promise or a  
Promise-authorized service center.  
Disclaimer of other warranties  
This warranty covers only parts and labor, and excludes coverage on software  
items as expressly set above.  
Except as expressly set forth above, Promise DISCLAIMS any warranties,  
expressed or implied, by statute or otherwise, regarding the product, including,  
without limitation, any warranties for fitness for any purpose, quality,  
merchantability, non-infringement, or otherwise. Promise makes no warranty or  
representation concerning the suitability of any product for use with any other  
item. You assume full responsibility for selecting products and for ensuring that  
the products selected are compatible and appropriate for use with other goods  
with which they will be used.  
Promise DOES NOT WARRANT that any product is free from errors or that it will  
interface without problems with your computer system. It is your responsibility to  
back up or otherwise save important data before installing any product and  
continue to back up your important data regularly.  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 9: Support  
No other document, statement or representation may be relied on to vary the  
terms of this limited warranty.  
Promise’s sole responsibility with respect to any product is to do one of the  
following:  
a) replace the product with a conforming unit of the same or superior  
product;  
b) repair the product.  
Promise shall not be liable for the cost of procuring substitute goods, services,  
lost profits, unrealized savings, equipment damage, costs of recovering,  
reprogramming, or reproducing of programs or data stored in or used with the  
products, or for any other general, special, consequential, indirect, incidental, or  
punitive damages, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, notwithstanding the  
failure of the essential purpose of the foregoing remedy and regardless of  
whether Promise has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Promise  
is not an insurer. If you desire insurance against such damage, you must obtain  
insurance from another party.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential  
damages for consumer products, so the above limitation may not apply to you.  
This warranty gives specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that  
vary from state to state. This limited warranty is governed by the State of  
California.  
Your Responsibilities  
You are responsible for determining whether the product is appropriate for your  
use and will interface with your equipment without malfunction or damage. You  
are also responsible for backing up your data before installing any product and  
for regularly backing up your data after installing the product. Promise is not liable  
for any damage to equipment or data loss resulting from the use of any product.  
Returning Product For Repair  
If you suspect a product is not working properly, or if you have any questions  
about your product, contact our Technical Support Staff through one of our  
Technical Services, making sure to provide the following information:  
•
•
•
•
•
Product model and serial number (required)  
Return shipping address  
Daytime phone number  
Description of the problem  
Copy of the original purchase invoice  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
The technician will assist you in determining whether the product requires repair.  
If the product needs repair, the Technical Support Department will issue an RMA  
(Return Merchandise Authorization) number.  
Important  
Obtain an RMA number from Technical Support before you return  
the product and write the RMA number on the label. The RMA  
number is essential for tracking your product and providing the  
proper service.  
Return ONLY the specific product covered by the warranty (do not ship cables,  
manuals, diskettes, etc.), with a copy of your proof of purchase to:  
USA and Canada:  
Other Countries:  
Promise Technology, Inc.  
Customer Service Dept.  
Attn.: RMA # ______  
47654 Kato Road  
Fremont, CA 94538  
Return the product to your dealer  
or retailer.  
Contact them for instructions  
before shipping the product.  
You must follow the packaging guidelines for returning products:  
•
•
•
•
Use the original shipping carton and packaging  
Include a summary of the product’s problem(s)  
Write an attention line on the box with the RMA number  
Include a copy of proof of purchase  
You are responsible for the cost of insurance and shipment of the product to  
Promise. Note that damage incurred due to improper transport or packaging is  
not covered under the Limited Warranty.  
When repairing returned product(s), Promise may replace defective parts with  
new or reconditioned parts, or replace the entire unit with a new or reconditioned  
unit. In the event of a replacement, the replacement unit will be under warranty  
for the remainder of the original warranty term from purchase date, or 30 days,  
whichever is longer.  
Promise will pay for standard return shipping charges only. You will be required to  
pay for any additional shipping options (such as express shipping).  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A: Useful Information  
•
Serial Connector Pinout (below)  
•
SNMP MIB Files (page 306)  
Serial Connector Pinout  
Below is the pinout diagram for the DB-9 serial connector on all VTraks.  
The diagrams represent the connector as you see it looking at the back of the  
VTrak.  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
RXD  
TXD  
—
1 2 3 4 5  
GND  
—
—
6 7 8 9  
—
—
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
SNMP MIB Files  
Promise supplies seven MIB files to integrate the VTrak M-Class subsystem into  
your SNMP system. These files are in the SNMP folder on the VTrak Product CD.  
The MIB files include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
promise.mib  
system.mib  
interface.mib  
PromiseRAIDV4Storage.mib  
PromiseRAIDV4System.mib  
FCMGMT-MIB.mib  
IF-MIB.mib  
Load MIB Files  
To prevent error messages, you must load the Promise-supplied MIB files in this  
order:  
1. Load the promise.mib file.  
2. Load the system.mib file.  
3. Load the interface.mib file.  
4. Load the remaining .mib files in any order.  
For help with this procedure, see the instructions that came with your MIB  
browser.  
Compliance Statement  
Promise VTrak M-Class Mx00f SNMP support is compliant to the IETF FC-  
MGMT MIB (RFC 4044) by implementing the following MIB groups:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ifGeneralInformationGroup  
ifVHCPacketGroup  
ifLinkUpDownNotificationGroup  
fcmInstanceBasicGroup  
fcmPortBasicGroup  
fcmPortStatsGroup  
fcmPortClass23StatsGroup  
fcmPortErrorStatsGroup  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
A
CLU  
exit 163  
About This Manual 1  
Accept Incomplete Array 187  
Alias 185  
Function Map 164  
Locate physical drive 181  
Problem reporting 268  
reports problem 268  
Serial connection 161  
Telnet connection 161  
Architectural Description of VTrak 3  
Architectural Description, VTrak M-  
Class 3  
Audible alarm 60, 160, 261  
Auto Rebuild 200  
CLU setup  
Axles 245  
M500f/p, M300f/p, M200f/p 32  
M500i, M300i, M200i 34  
coercion method (disk drives) 117,  
175  
Command Line Utility, setup 29  
Command Queuing 180  
Connection  
B
Background Activities 71  
Background Activity  
scheduler 72  
settings 71  
Background activity 139, 199  
Battery 120, 291  
Blowers 176  
power 26  
serial cable 25  
Connection problems and solutions  
292  
Buzzer 121, 214  
contents, VTrak box 11  
Controller  
C
Cache Line Size 252  
Cache Policy 132, 251  
Capacity Coercion 252  
Capacity, disk array 50  
Certifications 8, 9  
Channel Information, SCSI 95, 198  
Channel Settings, SCSI 95, 198  
CHAP 93, 197  
Check table 147  
CIM service 106, 210  
Clear Events 70  
Clear statistics 111, 212  
CLI setup  
alias 173, 175  
information 113, 114  
lock 74, 173  
management 174  
settings 116, 174  
statistics 116  
Controller Cache, unsaved data  
295  
Controller LED 26, 58, 158, 262  
Cooling Unit fan, M300, M200 226  
Cooling Unit fan, M500 221  
Create disk array 182  
Create logical drive 135, 187  
Critical 134, 142  
M500f/p, M300f/p, M200f/p 30  
M500i, M300i, M200i 30  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Disk Array, continued  
status 134  
D
DAS  
Transition 187  
transition 140  
transport 141, 185  
Disk drive  
Fibre Channel 21  
iSCSI 23  
SCSI 24  
Date and Time 174  
date and time setting  
CLI 30  
CLU 32, 35  
Dead 135, 143  
failure and recovery 286  
install 16  
numbering 18  
rebuild 286  
DMA Mode 179, 180  
drive carrier  
LED 27  
drive carriers 17, 18  
Dedicated to Array 151  
default settings, restore 110  
Degraded 134, 142  
Delete a scheduled activity 73  
Dimensions 7, 9  
dirty cache 295  
E
Email  
Disk Array  
Accept Incomplete Array 187  
alias 185  
service 100  
test message 101  
Email service 208  
enable SCSI target 96  
Enclosure  
background activity 139  
create 182  
create advanced 48, 131  
create automatically 45, 129  
create express 46, 129  
create manually 131  
critical 286  
delete 132, 184  
Expansion, range limits 256  
information 133, 185  
locate 187  
logical drives 134  
Media Patrol 185  
migration 137, 186  
offline 286  
online expansion 186  
PDM 185  
information 119  
locate 118, 179  
management 176  
Problem reporting 289  
settings 119, 177  
status 176  
Environmental 7, 9  
Error Block Threshold 200  
Event Frame 68  
Event Notification and Response  
271  
Event severity 77  
Event Subscription 77  
Events  
physical drives 134  
Predictive Data Migration 186  
Rebuild 287  
rebuild 138, 185  
settings 135, 185  
battery 271  
BBU 273  
blowers 272  
Cache 273  
Controller 273  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Events, contuned  
disk array 273  
Fibre Channel, continued  
LUN mapping 203  
Node 83, 192  
Drive-interface controller 273  
Enclosure 274  
Port 84, 192  
Event logging 274  
Fibre Channel 276  
Host-interface controller 274  
iSCSI 276  
Logical drive 276  
Media patrol 277  
Online capacity expansion 277  
PDM 278  
Physical drive 278  
Power Supply 280  
Power supply fan 280  
RAID Level Migration 281  
Rebuild 282  
Redundancy Check 282  
Resource 283  
SAN 20  
settings 84, 193  
SFP 86, 193  
Statistics 85, 194  
Firmware Update 217  
Firmware update  
CLU 219  
WebPAM PROe 217  
For 148, 149  
Force offline/online 127, 181  
Forced Offline 135, 142  
Forced Online 135, 142  
Frequently Asked Questions 297  
front panel LED  
M200f/i/p 26  
SEP 283  
SMART 283  
Spare check 283  
Spare drive 283  
M300f/i/p 26  
M500f/i/p 26  
FRU LED 26, 58, 158, 262  
FRU VPD 120  
Stripe Level Migration 284  
Synchronization 284  
Transition 285  
FRUs 215, 216  
Function Map, CLU 164  
Functional 134, 142  
VTrak System 285  
Watermark 285  
G
Export 109  
GB Truncate 252  
Group Rounding 252  
F
Factory defaults, restore 212  
FCC Statement 9  
Features and Benefits, VTrak M-  
Class 4  
H
Host PC, iSCSI initiator 39  
Hot Spare drive 253, 286  
Fibre Channel  
I
Activity LED 26, 58, 158, 263  
DAS 21  
Initiator 87  
initiator 194  
Logged-in Devices 87, 192  
Import 109  
Initialization 145, 189, 253  
setting 200  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Initiator 97  
LED, continued  
create 204  
drive carrier 27, 59, 159, 264  
delete 204  
front panel 26, 57, 157, 262  
FRU 58, 158, 216, 262  
network connectors 294  
power 58, 158, 262  
power/activity 27, 60, 160,  
264  
Fibre Channel 87, 194  
Install disk drives 16  
iSCSI 93  
Activity LED 26, 58, 158, 263  
CHAP 93, 197  
DAS 23  
red 262  
iSNS 92, 196  
LUN mapping 203  
Node 88, 195  
Ping 95  
Locate  
disk array 187  
enclosure 118, 179  
logical drive 190  
Physical drive 122, 125, 181  
spare drive 153  
Port 89, 195  
port settings 191  
SAN 22  
Lock 74, 173  
Log out of WebPAM PRO 54  
Logical Drive  
session 91  
sessions 196  
SLP 196  
check table 147  
create 47, 51, 54, 135, 187  
delete 137, 188  
in disk array 134  
information 143, 189  
initialization 145, 189  
locate 190  
partition and format 254  
PDM 147  
statistics 90, 196  
iSCSI connection problems 293  
iSCSI Data Ports 82  
iSCSI Initiator, host PC 39  
iSCSI Port IP address  
CLI 31  
CLU 37  
iSNS 92, 196  
Redundancy Check 146, 190  
settings 144, 189  
statistics 144  
L
language selection 65  
Language selection, WebPAM  
PROe 44, 65  
status 142  
status LED 26, 58, 158, 262  
summary 155  
synchronization 146  
login and password  
CLI and CLU 29  
Telnet 161  
WebPAM PROe 42, 62  
LUN 99  
LED  
amber 262  
back of enclosure 265  
color and flash pattern 59, 60,  
159, 160, 263, 264, 266,  
267  
controller 58, 158, 262  
disk status 60, 160, 264  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
LUN mapping  
numbering disk drives 18  
Fibre Channel 98, 148, 203  
NVRAM Events 201  
iSCSI 98, 148, 203  
SCSI 99, 149, 204  
O
Offline 135, 143  
Online expansion 186  
M
M200f/i/p  
Operating Systems, supported 7, 9  
Overheating 290  
front panel LED 26  
rackmount 14  
Overview 2  
Overview of VTrak 2  
Overview, VTrak M-Class 2  
specifications 8  
M300f 8  
M300f/i/p  
front panel LED 26  
P
rackmount 14  
Parallel ATA disk drives 297  
PDM 49, 147, 185, 257  
setting 71, 200  
specifications 8  
M500f/i/p  
font panel LED 26  
rackmount 12  
specifications 6  
PDM Running 135, 142  
PFA 135, 142  
Physical drive  
Maintenance 215  
Management Port 82  
settings 191  
capacity coercion 175, 252  
coercion 175  
failure 286  
Management Port IP address  
CLI 30  
force offline/online 127, 181  
global settings 123, 179  
in disk array 134  
individual settings 180  
information 124  
locate 122, 125, 181  
Media Patrol 128  
PATA 297  
CLU 33, 35  
Management Window 68  
manual rebuild 287  
Media Patrol 49, 128, 173, 185,  
257  
enable 200  
Media Patrol Running 135, 142  
Migration 137, 186  
setting 71, 200  
settings 126  
statistics 125, 180  
supported 297  
unconfigured 150  
Ping  
N
Netsend service 211  
Network connection problems 294  
Node  
iSCSI port 95, 197  
Polling Interval 177  
popup messages, meaning 271  
Fibre Channel 83  
iSCSI 88  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Port  
Renew Lock 74  
FibreChannel 84  
iSCSI 89  
Replace  
cache battery, M300, M200  
power connection 26  
Power LED 26, 58, 158, 262  
Power requirements 7, 9  
Power Supplies 176, 291  
replace 220  
233  
cache battery, M500 230  
Cooling unit fan M300, M200  
226  
Cooling unit fan M500 221  
fans 221  
Predictive Data Migration 186, 257  
RAID controller 237  
SEP, M300, M200 236  
SEP, M500 235  
R
rack mounting  
Restart  
M200f/i/p 14  
CLU 213  
WebPAM PROe 112  
M300f/i/p 14  
M500f/i/p 12  
Restore factory defaults 110, 212  
Revertible 140, 151, 187, 202  
RMA number 304  
Rackmount 12, 14  
RAID  
Introduction to 239  
Level, choices 50, 131, 247  
Migration 254  
RS-232 connector, pinout 305  
Runtime Events 201  
RAID 0 240, 247  
RAID 1 241, 247, 298  
RAID 10 244, 248  
RAID 1E 242, 248  
RAID 3 248  
S
SAN  
Fibre Channel 20  
iSCSI 22  
RAID 5 243, 248  
RAID 50 245, 249  
RAID 50 Axles 245  
Range of disk array expansion 256  
Read Ahead Cache 179  
Read cache 51  
SATA disk drive, install 18  
Save Events 70  
Schedule an Activity 72  
screws, counter-sink 16  
SCSI  
Channel Information 95, 198  
Channel Setting 95  
Channel Settings 95, 198  
connection problems 292  
DAS 24  
Read Cache Policy 189, 251  
Reassigned Block Threshold 200  
Rebuild 185  
setting 200  
Rebuild disk array 138  
Rebuilding 134, 142  
red X 289  
HBA card 297  
LUN mapping 204  
Management (CLU) 198  
Target Information 96, 199  
targets, enable 96  
termination 96  
Redundancy Check 146, 190  
setting 71, 200  
Release Lock 75  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Sector size 50, 132, 250  
Serial cable connection 25  
Serial connection  
problems 293  
Spare Drive, continued  
information 150, 153  
locate 153  
revertible 258  
Serial connection problems 293  
Server’s IP address 298  
Session, iSCSI 91, 196  
Set Lock 74  
settings 154, 203  
Specifications 6  
M200f/i/p 8  
M300f/i/p 8  
M500f/i/p 6  
Stale 135, 142  
Statistics  
Settings  
background activity 200  
controller 116, 174  
disk array 135, 185  
enclosure 119, 177  
Fibre Channel 84, 193  
iSCSI port 191  
clear 111, 212  
controller 116  
Fibre Channel 85, 194  
iSCSI 90, 196  
logical drive 144, 189  
management port 191  
physical drive 126, 179, 180  
spare drive 154  
logical drive 144  
physical drive 125, 180  
Status  
enclosure 176  
user 206  
logical drive 142  
Status Indicators 57, 157  
Storage network 66  
Storage Services 97  
Stripe Block size 250  
Stripe size 50, 132, 250  
Subsystem  
Setup  
command line utility 29  
WebPAM PROe 41  
Severity of events 77  
Shutdown  
CLU 213  
WebPAM PROe 111  
SLP 93, 196  
SLP service 101, 208  
SMART 175, 258  
SNMP  
alias 173  
events 70  
information 69  
settings 69  
Subsystem Events 70  
Synchronization 146  
setting 200  
service 104, 209  
Trap Sinks 210  
Software Management 100  
Spare Check 151, 152  
individual spare drive 155  
Spare Drive 46, 48  
check 152  
Synchronizing 134, 142  
System Date and Time 174  
T
Table Rounding 252  
create 151, 202  
Target Information, SCSI 96, 199  
Technical Support 299  
delete 152, 203  
hot spare drive 253  
Telnet service 103, 209  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTrak M-Class Product Manual  
Temperature Sensors 177  
Temperature Thresholds 178  
Termination, SCSI 96  
Test Email 77  
W
Warning, electro-static discharge  
11  
Warranty 302  
Web Server service 102  
WebPAM PROe  
Transceivers, Fibre Channel 86,  
193  
Transition 140, 187, 258  
setting 200  
Administrative Tools 75  
create user 79  
Transition Running 135, 142  
Transport 141, 185  
Transport Ready 135, 142  
Tree View 44, 67  
delete user 80  
Event Frame 68  
Export 109  
graphic user interface 64  
Import 109  
Troubleshooting 261  
Internet connection 55  
language selection 44  
login 41, 61  
U
Unpack VTrak 11  
logout 54, 63  
User  
Management Window 68  
previous versions 298  
Problem reporting 269  
red X 289  
Regular connection 41, 61  
restore default settings 110  
Secure connection 41, 61  
setup 41  
create 79, 205  
delete 80, 207  
notification events 78  
password 79, 206  
privileges 80  
sessions 81  
settings 206  
User database  
export 109  
storage network 66  
Tree View 44, 67  
User Information 76  
User password 79  
User Settings 76  
yellow ! 289  
import 109  
V
View Events 70  
Voltage Sensors 177  
VTrak  
WebPAMPROe  
language selection 65  
Webserver service 208  
Write Cache 51, 179  
Write Cache Policy 189, 252  
beeping 261  
Maintenance procedures 215  
returning for repair 303  
unpack 11  
VTrak M-Class  
architectural description 3  
features and benefits 4  
overview 2  
Y
yellow ! 289  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Flat Panel Television MCM2250 User Manual
Philips Network Cables SWA3301S 17 User Manual
Philips Universal Remote SRU510 User Manual
Philips Work Light ED 37 User Manual
Polycom IP Phone 1725 30960 001 User Manual
POSIFLEX Business Machines Computer Monitor 202EI User Manual
Poulan Snow Blower 436001 User Manual
Poulan Snow Blower 436132 User Manual
Princeton Blower VM 502 User Manual
PYLE Audio Car Stereo System PLDTF5M User Manual